DOC-baiyyinah Notes

TABLE OF CONTENTS – ‫الفهرس‬
Chapter 1 – Types of Words In Arabic .......................................................................................................... 1

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 1
Chapter 2 – ‫اإلعراب‬......................................................................................................................................... 5
2.1 Status – ‫ اإلعراب‬........................................................................................................................... 5
2.2 how to tell Status ....................................................................................................................... 7

2.3 Light vs Heavy .......................................................................................................................... 11
2.4 flexibility ................................................................................................................................... 13
2.5 Pronouns .................................................................................................................................. 18
2.6 Status in action......................................................................................................................... 21
2.7 ‫ اجلار واملجرور‬................................................................................................................................ 21
2.8 ‫ حرف انلصب واسمها‬........................................................................................................................ 23
2.9 ‫ اإلضافة‬........................................................................................................................................ 24
Chapter 3 – ‫ القسم‬- ‫ العدد‬-‫ اجلنس‬..................................................................................................................... 32
3.1 Gender – ‫الجنس‬......................................................................................................................... 32

3.2 Number – ‫ العدد‬......................................................................................................................... 35
3.3 Type - ‫القسم‬............................................................................................................................... 37
Chapter 4 – ‫ اسم‬in action ............................................................................................................................. 43
4.1 ‫ املوصوف والصفة‬............................................................................................................................. 43
4.2 ‫ اسم اإلشارة واملشار إيله‬..................................................................................................................... 44
4.3 Connector Letters – ‫ حروف العطف‬.............................................................................................. 49

ُ ْ َُُْ
Chapter 5 – ‫االس ِم َّية‬ ‫ اجلملة‬............................................................................................................................... 54
5.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................. 54

5.2 Finding the Invisible “IS” .......................................................................................................... 54
5.3 ‫ – إعراب الجملة االسمية‬Grammatical Labeling .............................................................................. 59
5.4 Abnormal Sentence Structure.................................................................................................. 62
5.5 “HE HAS” and “THERE IS” Sentences ....................................................................................... 64
5.6 Complex Sentences .................................................................................................................. 66
َ ‫ الف ْع ُل‬............................................................................................................................... 71
ْ ِ ‫الم‬
Chapter 6 – ‫اض‬
ِ ِ
6.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................. 71
6.2 ‫الماضي‬
ِ ‫ الفعل‬............................................................................................................................... 72
6.3 ‫ الفاعل‬......................................................................................................................................... 73
6.4 ‫ المفعول‬....................................................................................................................................... 74
6.7 Complex Sentences .................................................................................................................. 79
6.8 Question Words ....................................................................................................................... 80
Chapter 7 – ‫ الفعل المضارع‬.............................................................................................................................. 84
7.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................. 84

7.2 ‫الفعل المضارع‬............................................................................................................................... 84
7.3 ‫ حروف‬Associated with ‫ الفعل المضارع‬.......................................................................................... 85
7.4 Commanding and forbidding ................................................................................................... 89
7.7 ‫ نون التوكيد‬................................................................................................................................... 94
7.8 Distinguishing Between ‫ أسماء‬and ‫ أفعال‬.................................................................................... 96
Chapter 8 – ‫المبي للمجهول‬
ِ ‫ الفعل‬.................................................................................................................. 103
8.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 103
8.2 Sentence structure ................................................................................................................. 103
8.3 The Rhetorical Benefits of the Passive Voice ......................................................................... 110
8.4 Transitivity.............................................................................................................................. 111
Summary of Passives.................................................................................................................... 113
Chapter 9 - Negation ................................................................................................................................. 117
9.1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 117
9.2 Negating ‫ الجملة الفعلية‬............................................................................................................. 117
9.3 Negating ‫ الجملة االسمية‬............................................................................................................ 118
9.4 Shared Tools of Negation ....................................................................................................... 122
SUmmary of Negation.................................................................................................................. 126
Chapter 10 – ‫ األفعال الناقصة‬......................................................................................................................... 129
10.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 129
10.2 Sentence structure............................................................................................................... 130
10.3 Abnormal Sentence Structure.............................................................................................. 134
10.4 Complex Sentence Structure ............................................................................................... 134
10.5 Translating ‫ كان‬Sentences..................................................................................................... 135
10.6 Negating ‫ كان‬Sentences ........................................................................................................ 135
Chapter 11 – The compound ‫ اسم‬.............................................................................................................. 140
11.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................... 140
ْ
11.2 ‫ أن‬AND‫ أن‬............................................................................................................................... 140
11.3 tools that create Compound ‫مضاف إليه‬................................................................................. 141
The ‫ حرف‬Reference Sheet ......................................................................................................................... 143
CHAPTER 1 – TYPES OF WORDS IN ARABIC
INTRODUCTION
The smallest unit in language is the letter. Letters come together to form words, words come together
to form fragments, and fragments come together to form sentences. We will begin our study by learning
about the unit that is second from the bottom on the hierarchy – words. There are THREE TYPES of WORDS
in Arabic:
1. ‫ا ِْسم‬
2. ‫ف ِْعل‬
3. ‫َح ْرف‬
Every word in Arabic falls into one of these three categories. Let us learn the definition of each.
ُ‫ا ِالسْم‬
An ‫ اسم‬is defined as A PERSON , PLACE , THING, IDEA, ADJECTIVE , ADVERB, and MORE . Let us look at examples
of each.
A few examples of a PERSON would be:
- Muhammad
- Maryam
- teacher
- writer
Notice that the name of the person can be specific (Muhammad/Maryam) or general
(teacher/writer).
A few examples of a PLACE would be:
- Egypt
- Arabia
- school
- store
Notice again that the name of the place can be specific (Egypt/Arabia) or general (school/store)
A few examples of a THING would be:
- book
- pen
- camera
- table
A thing is a material object that can be touched (see the examples above).
A few examples of an IDEA would be:
1|Page
- justice
- happiness
- education
- authority
Ideas are different than things in that they are abstract and intangible – things that cannot be
touched (see the examples above).
A few examples of an ADJECTIVE would be:

- tall
- short
- boring
- exciting
Adjectives are words that are used to describe other words.
A few examples of an ADVERB would be:
- slowly
- quickly
- gently
- happily
Adverbs are words that describe how an action took place. They usually end in –ly.
The “MORE” category will be discussed in a later chapter.
ُ‫ال ِف ْعل‬
A ‫ فعل‬is defined as A WORD THAT HAS A TENSE . A ‫ فعل‬can be in the past, present, or future tense.
A few examples of a PAST -TENSE ‫ فعل‬would be:
- He stopped.
- He gave.
The action is complete; it is something that occurred in the past.
A few examples of a PRESENT - TENSE ‫ فعل‬would be:
- He searches.
- He learns.
The action is ongoing; it is something that is occurring in the present.
A few examples of a FUTURE -TENSE ‫ فعل‬would be:
- He will succeed.
- He will give up.
The action has not yet occurred; it is something that will occur in the future.
To test whether a word is a ‫ فعل‬or not, place the word “I” before it. If it makes sense, it is a ‫فعل‬.
Otherwise, it is not.
2|Page
Let us put the word “came” to the test. → I came → This makes sense, so “came” is a ‫فعل‬
Let us put the word “ice cream” to the test. → I ice cream → This does not make sense, so “ice cream is
not a ‫”فعل‬.
ُ‫ال َح ْرف‬
A ‫ حرف‬is defined as A WORD THAT IS INCOMPLETE UNLESS IT IS FOLLOWED BY EITHER AN ‫ اسم‬OR A ‫فعل‬. Another
definition for a ‫ حرف‬is a word that is neither an ‫ اسم‬nor a ‫فعل‬.
A few examples of a ‫ حرف‬would be:
- to
- from
- in
- with
- until
- if
For instance, “I came from” is an incomplete thought. The word “from” is a ‫حرف‬. For this reason, it
makes no sense on its own and requires either an ‫ اسم‬or ‫ فعل‬after it. “I came from home,” on the other
hand, is a complete thought because the ‫ حرف‬is followed by an ‫اسم‬.
➢ DRILL 1 Determine whether the words below are ‫( اسم‬I) or ‫( فعل‬F) or ‫( حرف‬H ).
We invited guests for dinner. They arrived early. I told my son to give them fruits and drinks and I put
the chicken in the oven hurriedly. He dropped the tray on the white carpet and the drinks spilled.
Guests are coming again today. I will remind him to carry the tray carefully this time.
3|Page
CHAPTER 1 & 2 MEMORIZATION
VOCABULARY ( SINGULAR - PLURAL )

ٌ ‫ِا ْم َرأَ ٌة – ن ِ َس‬
‫اء‬
ٌ ٌ
‫َر ُجل – ِر َجال‬ ٌ ‫َز ْو ٌج – أَ ْز‬
‫واج‬
ٌ ُ ُ
‫أ ٌّم – أ َّم َهات‬ ٌ َ‫أَ ٌب – آب‬
‫اء‬
woman Man spouse mother father
ٌَ ْ ٌ ْ ٌ َ َ ٌ َ‫ْاب ٌن – أَبْن‬ ٌ ُ ٌ ٌ ْ ‫بن‬ ٌ َ َ
‫ ِإخوة‬/‫أخ – ِإخوان‬ ‫ َبنُ ْون‬/‫اء‬ ‫ذ ِّر َّية‬ ‫ت – َبنَات‬ ِ ‫َو ٌَل – أ ْوالد‬
brother son/child offspring girl/daughters boy/child
ٌَ َْ ٌ َ ٌ ْ‫َف ٌم – أَف‬ ٌ‫َص ْد ٌر – ُص ُد ْور‬ ٌ َْ ٌ ََ َ ٌ ‫أُ ْخ‬
‫لِسان – أل ِسنة‬ ‫واه‬ ‫تْنيْل‬ ‫ت – أخوات‬
tongue/language mouth chest revelation sister
ٌ َ ٌَ ٌَ َْ ٌ َُ ُُ ٌ َْ ٌ‫َو ْج ٌه – ُو ُج ْوه‬ ٌَ َْ ٌ َُْ ٌ
‫َو َرقة – أ ْو َراق‬ ‫فؤاد – أفئِدة‬ ‫ب – قل ْو ٌب‬ ‫قل‬ ‫بنيان – أبنِية‬/‫بِناء‬
paper/leaf heart/intellect heart face building/structure
ٌَ ُ ٌ ٌ ْ‫َبي‬
ٌ ُ‫تاب – ُكت‬
ٌ ‫ك‬ ٌ ْ‫ أَق‬- ‫قَلَ ٌم‬ – ‫غ ْرفة‬ ٌ ْ‫ أَب‬- ‫باب‬
ٌ ‫ت – ُبيُ ْوت‬
‫ب‬ ِ ‫الم‬ ٌ َ ُ ٌ ُ ‫واب‬
‫غ ُرفات‬/‫غ َرف‬ house
book pen door
room
‫اك ُن‬ ََ ٌ َ َ ُ ٌ َ
‫ق ْر َية – ق ًرى‬
ٌ َ ٌَ َ
‫َك َمات‬ ٌ ‫َم‬ ٌ
‫َحيَاة‬
ِ ‫مَكن – أم‬ ِ – ‫َكمة‬
ِ ‫اء‬
place town word water life
In addition to the vocabulary listed above you are responsible for the following tables included in
these chapters:
- Muslim Chart
o Normal
o Light
- Pronouns
- Harf of Jarr
- Harf of Nasb
- Special Mudhaaf
- 5 Special Isms
4|Page
CHAPTER 2 – ‫اإلعراب‬
INTRODUCTION
The first of the three types of words that we will study is the ‫اسم‬. Every ‫ اسم‬has four properties. Their four
properties are status (‫)اإلعراب‬, gender (‫)اجلنس‬, number (‫)العدد‬, and type (‫)القسم‬.
Remember not to lose sight of where we are in our studies.
Status ‫إعراب‬
Gender ‫جنس‬
‫اسم‬
Language
Number ‫عدد‬
Sentences Fragments Words ‫حرف‬
‫فعل‬ Type ‫قسم‬
2.1 STATUS – ‫اإلعراب‬
Gender ‫جنس‬
‫اسم‬
Words
Number ‫عدد‬
‫حرف‬
Status is the first of the four properties. Status has to do with the role an ‫ اسم‬is playing in a sentence. In
Arabic, an ‫ اسم‬can have one of three statuses. The status depends on the role the ‫ اسم‬is playing.
ْ
STATUS #1 : THE DOER - ‫رَ ف ع‬
The doer is the one who carries out the action. Take a look at the following examples.
I ate too much chocolate.
5|Page
The action here is “ate”. Now ask yourself who it was who ate. It is the speaker “I” who did the
action. In this sentence “I” is the doer.
My tooth is aching.
The action here is “aching”. Now asking yourself what is doing the aching. It is the tooth. In this
sentence “tooth” is the doer.
The dentist gave me a filling.

The action here is “gave”. Now ask yourself who is the one who gave. It is the dentist. In this
sentence, “dentist” is the doer.
When searching for the doer in a sentence, follow a two-step process:
1. Identify the action

2. Ask yourself “Who is doing the action?”
Note that it is possible for the doer to be non-human.
‫ رفع‬is also known as the default status. If there is no reason for an ‫ اسم‬to be put in another status, it
remains in the ‫ رفع‬status.
ْ ْ ٌ ُ َ
The doer is always in the ‫ َرف ٌع‬status. The way you say “in the ‫ َرفع‬status” in Arabic is ‫م ْرف ْوع‬. MEMORIZE this
term and use it.
ْ َ
STATUS #2 : THE DETAIL - ‫نصب‬
The detail refers to additional information about the action. When looking for a detail in a sentence,
follow a two-step process:
1) Find the action and the doer

2) Everything else in the sentence is a detail
Muhammad ate chocolate at home yesterday happily because he was hungry.
doer action detail detail detail detail detail
ْ َ ْ َ َْ
The detail is always in the ‫ نصب‬status. The way you say “in the ‫ نصب‬status” in Arabic is ‫من ُص ْو ٌب‬. MEMORIZE
this term and use it.
STATUS #3 : AFTER-OF - ‫جر‬

َ
After-of is, quite literally, the word that occurs after “of”. Take a look at the following example:
advisor of the king

In this fragment, “the king” is the word after “of”.
6|Page
This status is straightforward and easy to spot. There are some cases, however, in which the “of” is not
clear and the sentence must be rearranged to make the “of” easy to spot. The fragment “my book” for
instance, can be rearranged to read “book of mine.” In this case, the word “my” or “mine” is the word
after of.
How do you know when a fragment needs rearranging? Whenever you see possession (his, hers, my, our
etc.), the fragment can be rearranged to show the “of”.
َْ
The after-of is always in the ‫ َجر‬status. The way you say “in the ‫ َجر‬status” in Arabic is ‫َم ُر ْو ٌر‬. MEMORIZE this
term and use it.
➢ DRILL 1 Determine the status of each ‫اسم‬. Label them ‫( رفع‬R) or ‫( نصب‬N) or ‫( جر‬J ).
The teacher entered the classroom. His student was sleeping soundly. He threw a pencil, and the
student woke up suddenly. The student’s mother called the teacher the next day and confronted him
angrily. The teacher lost his job.
2.2 HOW TO TELL STAT US
In English, we were able to determine the status based on the meaning. In Arabic, however, status is
determined by a marker or sign at the end of the word.
As you know, there are three statuses in Arabic. There are, however, more than three status markers or
signs. In other words, there are more than three ways that the status of a word can show. This is
because each status can show in different ways depending on the number and the gender of the word.
It is important to keep in mind that whenever you are trying to figure out the status of an Ism you must
look at the ending of the word. There are two types of endings we will see, ending sounds (vowel
change at the end) and ending combinations (letters added to the end of a word).
The number/gender variations are singular, pair, masculine plural, and feminine plural. Take a look at
the charts below. Notice how each status looks different depending on the number and the gender of
the word.
The word ‫ مسلم‬is the base. Anything beyond the last letter – in this case, the ‫( – م‬whether it is a ‫ حركة‬or
letters) is part of the status marker.
MEMORIZE these charts.
Plural Pair Singular

َ
‫ُم ْس ِل ُم ْون‬ ‫مان‬ ْ ُ
ِ ‫مس ِل‬ ‫ُم ْس ِل ٌم‬ ‫رفع‬
7|Page
َ ْ ‫ُم ْسلم‬
‫ي‬ ‫ي‬
َْ ْ ُ
‫ُم ْس ِل ًما‬
ِِ ِ ‫مس ِلم‬ ‫نصب‬
‫ي‬َ ْ ‫ُم ْسلم‬ ‫ي‬
َْ ْ ُ
‫ُم ْس ِلم‬
ِِ ِ ‫مس ِلم‬ ‫جر‬
Plural Feminine Pair Feminine Singular Feminine

ٌ ٌ
‫ُم ْس ِلمات‬ ‫تان‬ َ ْ ُ
ِ ‫مس ِلم‬ ‫ُم ْس ِل َمة‬ ‫رفع‬
ََْ ْ ُ ً
‫ُم ْس ِلمات‬ ‫ي‬ِ ‫مس ِلمت‬ ‫ُم ْس ِل َمة‬ ‫نصب‬
ََْ ْ ُ
‫ُم ْس ِلمات‬ ‫ي‬ ِ ‫مس ِلمت‬ ‫ُم ْس ِل َمة‬ ‫جر‬
ً
*Note that the ‫ )تنوين فتح( ًـ‬must sit on either an ‫ ا‬or a ‫ ة‬or a ‫ء‬. This is why the ‫ ا‬is added to the word ‫مسلما‬
when it is in the ‫ نصب‬status.
Let us now take a closer look at each number/gender combination.
SINGULAR
The word ‫ مسلم‬is the base and the status marker is the ‫ حركة‬that sits on the last letter. This type of status
marker is called an ENDING SOUND.
Status Ending Sound
‫رفع‬ ٌ
‫مسلم‬
‫نصب‬ ً
‫مسلما‬
‫جر‬ ‫مسلم‬
To make a singular word feminine, just add a ‫ ة‬to the end of the word. This makes the base for the
feminine ‫مسلمة‬. The status marker is the ‫حركة‬.
Status Ending Sound

ٌَ
‫رفع‬ ‫مسلمة‬
ًَ
‫نصب‬ ‫مسلمة‬
‫جر‬ َ
‫مسلمة‬
***N OTE that when adding a ‫ ة‬to any word, the letter before the ‫ ة‬gets a ‫فتحة‬.
8|Page
PAIR
The base is ‫ مسلم‬and everything beyond that is the status marker. Here, the ‫ فتحة‬on the ‫ م‬as well as the ‫ان‬
make up the status marker. We call this an ENDING COMBINATION because it is made up of more than a
single ‫حركة‬.
Status Ending Combination
‫رفع‬ ‫ان‬ َ
ِ ‫مسلم‬
َْ
‫نصب‬ ‫ي‬ِ ‫مسلم‬
َْ
‫جر‬ ‫ي‬ ِ ‫مسلم‬
Notice that the ‫ نصب‬and ‫ جر‬forms are exactly the same. The way to distinguish between them is context.
By the time we complete our study of fragments and sentences, you will easily be able to distinguish
between the ‫ نصب‬and ‫ جر‬forms.
When creating the pair form of the feminine, the base is ‫ مسلمة‬and the ending combination is the ‫ان‬
ِ that
attaches to the end. In script, however, nothing can attach to a ‫ة‬, so it opens up and becomes a ‫ت‬.
‫رفع‬ ‫تان‬ َ
ِ ‫مسلم‬
ََْ
‫نصب‬ ‫ي‬ِ ‫مسلمت‬
ََْ
‫جر‬ ‫ي‬ ِ ‫مسلمت‬
Notice that the ‫ ت‬always takes a ‫فتحة‬.
PLURAL
There are two variations of the plural: masculine and feminine. Take a look at the charts below.
MASCULINE
In the plural masculine form, the status is determined by an ending combination just as it is in the pair
form. The combination is made up of two letters that attach to the end of the word.
9|Page
َ ُ
‫رفع‬ ‫مسلم ْون‬
‫نصب‬ ‫ي‬َ ْ ‫مسلم‬
ِ
‫جر‬ ‫ي‬ َ ْ ‫مسلم‬
ِ
Notice that word ‫ مسلم‬remains the same throughout. The ending combination acts as an add-on and
does not change the make-up of the word. Notice that the last letter in the word, the ‫م‬, gets a ‫ ضمة‬in the
‫ رفع‬form and a ‫ كرسة‬in the ‫ نصب‬and ‫ جر‬forms. Also notice that the ‫ نصب‬and ‫ جر‬forms are exactly the
same. The way to distinguish between the ‫ نصب‬and ‫ جر‬forms is context.
FEMININE
In the plural feminine form, the status is determined by an ending combination just as it is in the pair
and plural masculine forms. The combination is made up of two letters that attach to the end of the
word.

ٌ َ
‫رفع‬ ‫مسلمات‬
‫نصب‬ َ
‫مسلمات‬
‫جر‬ َ
‫مسلمات‬
Notice that the ‫ م‬gets a ‫ فتحة‬in all the forms. Also notice that the ‫ نصب‬and ‫ جر‬forms are exactly the same.
The way to distinguish between them is context.
Now that you are familiar with all of the status markers, you should be able to determine the status of a
word in Arabic. It is important to note that when determining status, you should ALWAYS look for ending
combinations BEFORE you look for ending sounds.
Furthermore, notice that there is no real difference in ending sounds or combinations for singular
masculine/feminine and pair masculine/feminine. Therefore, the Muslim Chart can be further simplified
as follows:
Plural Feminine Plural Masculine Pair Singular

ٌ َ
‫ُم ْس ِلمات‬ ‫ُم ْس ِل ُم ْون‬ ‫مان‬
ِ ‫مس ِل‬
ْ ُ ‫ُم ْس ِل ٌم‬ ‫رفع‬
‫ُم ْس ِلمات‬ ‫ي‬ َ ْ ‫ُم ْسلم‬ ‫ي‬
َْ ْ ُ
10 | P a g e
‫ُم ْس ِلمات‬ َ ْ ‫ُم ْسلم‬
‫ي‬ ‫ي‬
َْ ْ ُ ْ ُ
ِِ ِ ‫مس ِلم مس ِلم‬ ‫جر‬
➢ DRILL 2 Is the word “Muslim” ‫( رفع‬R) or ‫( نصب‬N) or ‫( جر‬J).

ٌ ْ ُ َ ْ ُ ْ ُ
R/N/J 7. ‫م س ِل َم ة‬ R/N/J 4. ‫ان‬
ِ ‫م س ِل م‬ R/N/J 1. ‫م س ِل ًم ا‬
َ ْ ‫ُم ْس ل م‬
8. ‫ي‬ 5. ‫م س لِ مات‬
ْ ُ َ
2. ‫م س لِ ُم ْو ن‬
ْ ُ
R/N/J ِِ R/N/J R/N/J
َ َ ْ ُ ْ ُ َ ْ ْ ُ
R/N/J 9. ‫ان‬
ِ ‫م س لِ م ت‬ R/N/J 6. ‫م س لِ م‬ R/N/J 3. ‫ي‬
ِ ‫م س لِ م‬
ْ ُ ََْ ْ ُ ٌ ْ ُ
R/N/J 10. ‫م س ِل ٌم‬ R/N/J 7. ‫ي‬
ِ ‫م س لِ م ت‬ R/N/J 4. ‫م س لِ َم ات‬
➢ DRILL 3 Is the word “Muslim” ‫( رفع‬R) or ‫( نصب‬N) or ‫( جر‬J). How would you write the word
in Arabic?
1. A Muslim woman travelled. R/N/J
2. The religion of a Muslim is Islam. R/N/J
3. I met a Muslim woman. R/N/J
4. The religion of Muslims is Islam. R/N/J
5. Two Muslims travelled. R/N/J
6. Muslims travelled. R/N/J
7. I met a Muslim. R/N/J
8. The religion of two Muslims is Islam. R/N/J
9. I met Muslims. R/N/J
10. The house of a Muslim woman is clean. R/N/J
2.3 LIGHT VS HEAVY
Lightness and heaviness are not from among the four properties of the ‫اسم‬. Rather, the discussion of
light and heavy is a sub-topic that falls under status. Now that we have learned about the different
11 | P a g e
markers that we can use to determine status, we will learn about different variations and forms that
these markers can take.
Notice that every word in the ‫ مسلم‬chart ends in an ‘n’ sound, whether it be an ending sound or
combination. These words are considered heavy. HEAVY is the DEFAULT . To make a word light, all you
have to do is remove the ‘n’ sound at the end.

muslimoo na muslimaa ni muslimu n ‫رفع‬
muslimee na muslimay ni muslima n ‫نصب‬
muslimee na muslimay ni muslimi n ‫جر‬
muslimaatu n muslimataa ni muslimatu n ‫رفع‬
muslimaati n muslimatay ni muslimata n ‫نصب‬
muslimaati n muslimatay ni muslimati n ‫جر‬
To get rid of the ‫ ن‬sound in Arabic, use the following rules.
ْ َّ َ َ
1) If the word ends in a double accent (‫)اتلن ِويْن‬, replace the double accent with a single ‫ح َركة‬. For
ٌ
instance, the word ‫مسلم‬ would become ‫مسلم‬. ُ The word ‫ مسلمات‬would become ‫مسلمات‬.
ِ
2) If the word ends in the letter ‫ن‬, all you have to do is drop the ‫ن‬. For instance, the word ‫مسلمون‬
becomes ‫مسلمو‬.
Below are the ‫ مسلم‬charts in the light form. MEMORIZE them.

‫ُم ْس ِل ُم ْو‬ ‫ُم ْس ِلما‬ ‫ُم ْس ِل ُم‬ ‫رفع‬
‫م‬ ْ ِ ‫ُم ْس ِل‬ ‫م‬ْ َ ‫ُم ْس ِل‬ ‫ُم ْس ِل َم‬ ‫نصب‬
‫م‬ ْ ِ ‫ُم ْس ِل‬ ْ َ ‫ُم ْس ِل‬
‫م‬ ‫ُم ْس ِل ِم‬ ‫جر‬

ُ ُ
‫ُم ْس ِلمات‬ ‫ُم ْس ِل َمتا‬ ‫ُم ْس ِل َمة‬ ‫رفع‬
12 | P a g e
ْ ُ ْ َ ‫ُم ْس ِل َم‬ َ
‫مات‬
ِ ‫مس ِل‬ ‫ت‬ ‫ُم ْس ِل َمة‬ ‫نصب‬
‫مات‬ ْ ُ ْ َ ‫ُم ْس ِل َم‬ ‫ُم ْس ِل َم ِة‬
ِ ‫مس ِل‬ ‫ت‬ ‫جر‬
As stated previously, the heavy form is the default form for an ‫اسم‬. An ‫ اسم‬is not made light unless there
is a reason. The details pertaining to these reasons will be discussed later on in the book.
Status ‫إعراب‬ light and heavy
Gender ‫جنس‬
‫االسم‬
Number ‫عدد‬
Type ‫قسم‬
*Note that the discussion of heavy and light becomes irrelevant when the word has an ‫ ال‬on it. This is
ٌ
because ‫ تنوين‬and ‫ ال‬NEVER come together. For example, the word ‫املسلم‬ is incorrect. You can only say
ُ
‫املسلم‬. The words that end in ‫ن‬, on the other hand, keep their ‫ ن‬even when there is an ‫ ال‬on the word.
The word ‫ املسلمون‬is correct; there is no need to drop the ‫ن‬.
➢ DRILL 4 Are the following words light, heavy, or irrelevant?
L IGHT , H EAVY , OR I RRELEVANT WORD L IGHT , H EAVY , OR I RRELEVANT WORD

ْ َ ََ
L /H/ I 1. ‫عصف‬ L /H/ I 2. ‫مغانِ َم‬
َْ َ َ ْ َّ ُ
L /H/ I 3. ‫لل‬
ِ ‫س ِبيل ا‬ L /H/ I 4. ‫مت ِقي‬
L /H/ I
ْ ُ ُْ
5. ‫مه ِلكو‬ L /H/ I
َْ
6. ‫القائِ ِلي‬
َ
َ َ َ ًْ ُ
L /H/ I 7. ‫اجد‬ ِ ‫مس‬ L /H/ I 8. ‫م ِبينا‬
َ َ َّ ََْْ
L /H/ I 9. ‫ات‬ ِ ‫السمو‬ L /H/ I 10. ‫ي‬
ِ ‫ِابنت‬
2.4 FLEXIBILITY
Flexibility is not one of the four properties of the ‫اسم‬. Rather, it is a sub-topic under status. This topic,
just like light and heavy, deals with the different forms the status markers can take.
** The discussion of flexibility only pertains to words that have an ENDING SOUND. **
Therefore, for flexibility we are only focused on the following parts of the Muslim Chart:
13 | P a g e
Plural Feminine Plural Masculine Pair Singular
ٌ َ
‫ُم ْس ِلمات‬ ‫ُم ْس ِل ُم ْون‬ ‫مان‬
ِ ‫مس ِل‬
ْ ُ ‫ُم ْس ِل ٌم‬ ‫رفع‬
َْ ْ ُ
َْ ْ ُ
‫ُم ْس ِلم‬
ِِ ِ ‫مس ِلم‬ ‫جر‬
There are three forms of flexibility. They are:

ْ ُ
1) fully-flexible (‫مع َرب‬/‫ف‬ ‫َص‬َ ُْ
ِ ‫)من‬
ْ َّ ‫ع ِمن‬ٌ ُْْ َ
2) partly-flexible (‫الَص ِف‬ ‫)ممنو‬
3) non-flexible (‫)مبْ ِن‬
َ
We will discuss partly-flexible last, because it requires the most attention.
ْ ُ
FULLY-FLEXIBLE (‫مع َرب‬/‫ف‬‫َص‬َ ُْ
ِ ‫ )من‬is the default state for a word. It is the broadest category. A fully-flexible
word is a word that can show all three statuses in a normal way according to what we learned in the
‫ مسلم‬chart.
Fully-Flexible Endings are:

ٌ
‫ رفع‬: ‫مسلم‬ (un)
ً
‫ نصب‬: ‫مسلما‬ (an)
‫ جر‬: ‫( مسلم‬in)
(3 Statuses have 3 Unique Endings)
NON-FLEXIBLE (‫)مبْ ِن‬

َ words are the opposite of fully-flexible words. They can never show their status.
This means that they look the same in the ‫ رفع‬status, the ‫ نصب‬status, and the ‫ جر‬status. Words that end
ْ َ َ ُ ً ُ ََ
in ‫ (ى) أ ِلف َمق ُص ْو َرة‬or a normal ‫ (ا) ا‬are non-flexible. Words like ‫م ْوس‬, ‫هدى‬, and ‫زك ِر َّيا‬, for example, are non-
َ ‫اء اإل َش‬ َ َ
flexible. All of the pointer words (‫ار ِة‬ ُ ‫ )أ ْس َم‬in the singular and plural forms as well as all of the ‫أ ْس َماء‬
ِ
َ
‫ موصولة‬are non-flexible. We will learn about these types of ‫ أ ْس َماء‬in detail later. For the time being, learn
to recognize them and know that they are non-flexible.
‫األسماء املوصولة‬ ‫أسماء اإلشارة‬
14 | P a g e
ْ َّ َّ َ َ َ
‫اَّلي َن‬ِ ‫اَّل ْي‬
ِ ‫ذلِك‬ ‫هذا‬
ْ ‫ َّاال‬،‫وات‬
‫ئ‬ ْ َّ ‫ال‬،‫ت‬ َّ
ْ ‫اال‬ ‫ت‬ْ َّ‫ال‬ َ ْ
‫تِلك‬ ‫ه ِذ ِه‬
َ
ِ ِ ِ ِ
َ ُْ َ
‫َم ْن‬ ‫ما‬ ‫أوالئِك‬ ‫ه ُؤال ِء‬
Non-Flexible Endings all look the same, there is no way to distinguish them by looking at the
word alone:
‫ُم ْو َ ى‬
‫ رفع‬: ‫س‬
‫ نصب‬: ‫س‬
‫ جر‬: ‫س‬
(3 Statuses have 1 Ending)

ٌ ُْْ َ
ْ َّ ‫ع من‬
PARTLY-FLEXIBLE (‫الَص ِف‬ ِ ‫ )ممنو‬are words that can only display their status in two ways. A partly-
َْ
flexible word can only take a ‫ ضمة‬and a ‫فتحة‬. A partly-flexible word can also never take ‫تن ِويْن‬. This type of
word takes a single ‫ ضمة‬in the ‫ رفع‬form, a single ‫ فتحة‬in the ‫ نصب‬form, and a single ‫ فتحة‬in the ‫ جر‬form.
Partly-Flexible Endings are:

ُ
‫ رفع‬:‫( ُي ْو ُسف‬u)
َ
‫ نصب‬:‫( ُي ْو ُسف‬a)
َ
‫ جر‬: ‫( ُي ْو ُسف‬a)
Notice that ‫ نصب‬and ‫ جر‬look the same. We have seen this problem before in ending
combinations.
(3 Statuses have 2 Endings)
**Unlike a non-flexible word, there are times when a partly-flexible word can be made fully flexible by
showing a ‫ كرسة‬in the ‫ جر‬form. A partly-flexible word can be made fully-flexible in two ways:
1) by adding an ‫ال‬
2) by making it a ‫( مضاف‬discussed in a later chapter)
HOW TO INDENTIFY PARTLY FLEXIBLE WORDS
15 | P a g e
There is no clear marker for partly flexible words. You will become accustomed to identifying partly-
flexible words as you are exposed to more vocabulary. However, there are a few categories of partly-
flexible words we can familiarize ourselves with to make identification of partly-flexible words easier.
A. NON-ARAB NAMES
Non-Arab names are partly-flexible. Arab names are fully-flexible. There are four Arab prophet’s names
ٌ َُ ٌ ُ ُ
ٌ ْ‫ش َعي‬.
mentioned in the Quran. They are: ‫ُم َّمد‬, ‫ه ْود‬, ‫صا ِل ٌح‬, and ‫ب‬ Take a look at the chart below. Take note of
the differences between how the partly-flexible names and the fully-flexible names look in each status.
‫جر‬ ‫نصب‬ ‫رفع‬

َ َ ُ
‫يُ ْو ُسف‬ ‫يُ ْو ُسف‬ ‫يُ ْو ُسف‬
َْ ْ َْ ْ ُْ ْ
Partly-flexible
‫ِإسما ِعيل‬ ‫ِإسما ِعيل‬ ‫ِإسما ِعيل‬
ْ ْ ْ
‫إِبْرا ِهي َم‬ ‫إِبْرا ِهي َم‬ ‫إِبْرا ِهي ُم‬
َُْ َُْ َُْ
‫يعق ْو َب‬ ‫يعق ْو َب‬ ‫يعق ْو ُب‬
‫َم ْر َي َم‬ ‫َم ْر َي َم‬ ‫َم ْر َي ُم‬
َُ ً َُ ٌ َُ
‫ُم َّمد‬ ‫ُم َّمدا‬ ‫ُم َّمد‬
ُ ً ُ ٌ ُ
‫ه ْود‬ ‫ه ْودا‬ ‫ه ْود‬
Fully-flexible
‫صا ِلح‬ ‫صاِلًا‬
ِ ‫صا ِل ٌح‬
ْ ُ ْ ُ ٌ ْ‫ُش َعي‬
‫ش َعيب‬ ‫ش َعيبًا‬ ‫ب‬
There is one exception to this rule. Three-letter names with a ‫ سكون‬on the middle letter are always fully-
flexible, even if they are non-Arab names.

Fully-flexible
ُ ُ ُ
‫ل ْوط‬ ‫ل ْو ًطا‬ ‫ل ْو ٌط‬
ُ ُ ٌ ُ
‫ن ْوح‬ ‫ن ْو ًحا‬ ‫ن ْوح‬
B. FEMININE NAMES AND UNIQUELY MASCULINE NAMES
16 | P a g e
All feminine names are partly-flexible. Masculine names that have no feminine counterpart are also
partly flexible. Below are some commonly occurring uniquely masculine names. Memorize them. We
will learn the rest as we encounter them.

َ َ َ َ ُ َ
‫اعئِشة‬ ‫اعئِشة‬ ‫اعئِشة‬
َ ْ َ َ ْ َ ُ ْ َ
‫خ ِدْيَة‬ ‫خ ِدْيَة‬ ‫خ ِدْيَة‬
Feminine
‫ب‬ َ َ‫َزيْن‬ ‫ب‬ َ َ‫َزيْن‬ ‫ب‬ ُ َ‫َزيْن‬
َ ْ َ ْ ُ ْ
‫ِإي َمان‬ ‫ِإي َمان‬ ‫ِإي َمان‬
َ َْ َ َْ ُ َْ
‫َح َزة‬ ‫َح َزة‬ ‫َح َزة‬
َ َ ُ
Uniquely masculine
‫عاو َية‬ ُ ‫عاو َية‬ ُ ‫عاو َية‬ ُ
ِ ‫م‬ ِ ‫م‬ ِ ‫م‬
ُ ُ ُ
‫ع َم َر‬ ‫ع َم َر‬ ‫ع َم ُر‬
َ ُْ َ ُْ ُ ُْ
‫عث َمان‬ ‫عث َمان‬ ‫عث َمان‬
Again, three-letter names with a ‫ سكون‬on the middle letter are always fully-flexible.
C. PROPER NAMES OF PLACES
Proper names of places are partly-flexible.

َ َّ َ َّ ُ َّ
‫َمكة‬ ‫َمكة‬ ‫َمكة‬
َْ َْ َْ
‫ْث َب‬ ِ ‫ي‬ ‫ْث َب‬ ِ ‫ي‬ ‫ْث ُب‬ ِ ‫ي‬
َّ َّ َّ
‫َج َهن َم‬ ‫َج َهن َم‬ ‫َج َهن ُم‬
Some names of places have an ‫ال‬. In such cases, the name is fully-flexible.

َ ُ
‫راق‬
ِ ‫ال ِع‬ ‫ال ِعراق‬ ‫ال ِعراق‬
17 | P a g e
ْ َْ ْ
‫الهن ِد‬
ِ ‫الهند‬
ِ ‫الهن ُد‬
ِ
Names of places that are three letters with a ‫ سكون‬on the middle letter are fully-flexible.

ْ ًْ ٌ ْ
‫َعدن‬ ‫َعدنا‬ ‫َعدن‬
There are certain word patterns that are partly-flexible. We will look at these patterns in our study of
Sarf.
Note: In your vocabulary, partly flexible words will be denoted by having a single vowel ending, not a
‫تنوين‬. For now, as you memorize new vocabulary, make a note of which words are partly-flexible.
light and heavy

fully flexible
flexibility partly flexible
Gender ‫جنس‬
non flexible
Number ‫عدد‬
Type ‫قسم‬
➢ DRILL 5 Are the following words fully, partly, or non-flexible? Why?
R EASON F LEXIBILITY WORD R EASON F LEXIBILITY WORD

َّ َ ُ َ ْ‫َطل‬
F / P / N 1. ‫ُممد‬ F/P/N 2. ‫حة‬
ً ُ َ
F / P / N 3. ‫هدى‬ F/P/N 4. ‫صا ِلح‬
َّ َ َ ُْ
F / P / N 5. ‫جهنم‬ F/P/N 6. ‫نوح‬
َّ َ ْ
F / P / N 7. ‫مكة‬ F/P/N 8.‫َعدن‬
َ ُ َّ َ َ
F / P / N 9. ‫عمر‬ F/P/N 10. ‫زكريا‬
ِ
2.5 PRONOUNS
Before we continue with our study of the remaining 3 properties of the Ism, lets take a look at Isms that
don’t follow the rules of status mentioned above: Pronouns.
Pronouns are a special type of ‫ اسم‬that do not display their four properties in a standard way. We will
18 | P a g e
َ َُْ َ and
learn about two types of pronouns in this chapter. They are independent pronouns (‫المنف ِصلة‬ ‫)الضمائِر‬
َ ُ
attached pronouns (‫الم َّت ِصلة‬ َ
‫)الضمائِر‬. We will see how each type of pronoun shows status. Pronouns are an
integral part of the Arabic language, as almost every sentence contains a pronoun.
INDEPENDENT PRONOUNS
Independent pronouns are pronouns that stand alone as their own word and do not attach to another
word. Independent pronouns are always in the ‫ رفع‬status. As for type, pronouns are always proper. The
number and gender of each pronoun is based on its meaning and labeled in the chart below.
MEMORIZE the pronouns and their meanings and know their properties.

ُ ُ ُ
‫ه ْم‬ ‫هما‬ ‫ه َو‬
masculine
third person
They Both of them He

ُ ُ
‫ه َّن‬ ‫هما‬ َ ِ
‫ه‬
feminine
They Both of them She
ْ‫أَ ْنتُم‬ ُ َْ
‫أنتما‬ َ‫أَنْت‬
masculine
second person
َّ‫أَنْ ُت‬ َْ َْ
All of you You two You
ُ
‫أنتما‬ ‫ت‬
ِ ‫أن‬
feminine
ُ‫ََنْن‬ َ
‫أنا‬
first person
both
We I
ATTACHED PRONOUNS
Every independent pronoun has an attached counterpart. Attached pronouns attach either to a ‫ حرف‬or a
‫ فعل‬or another ‫اسم‬. Attached pronouns are always either in the ‫ نصب‬or ‫ جر‬status. All attached pronouns
look the same in the ‫ نصب‬and ‫ جر‬status except for the ‫ أنا‬version. The way to tell what is ‫ نصب‬and what is
‫ جر‬is to look at what the pronoun is attached to. This will be discussed further in later chapters.
MEMORIZE the attached pronouns and their meanings. Review the independent pronouns. MEMORIZE
the two in conjunction.

third person
19 | P a g e
ُ ُ ُ
‫ِه ْم‬ ‫ه ْم‬
masculine
‫ِهما‬ ‫هما‬ ‫ـ ِه‬ ‫ـه‬
They Both of them He
ُ ُ َ
‫ِه َّن‬ ‫ه َّن‬ ‫هما ِهما‬ ‫ها‬
feminine
They Both of them She
ُ ُ
‫ك ْم‬ ‫كما‬ ‫َك‬
masculine
ُ
ُ
‫ك َّن‬ ‫كما‬ ‫ِك‬
feminine
‫نا‬ ْ
)‫ِن (نصب) ي (جر‬ِ
both
We I
Notice that for many of the pronouns, there are two variations with differences in the ‫حركة‬. These
variations do not indicate a change in status or any other property. Rather, the ‫ حركة‬on the attached
pronoun may change depending on the last ‫ حركة‬on the word it attaches to. You will get a feel for this
with time. The only exception to this is the ‫ أنا‬version, where the different versions indicate different
statuses.
SUMMARY OF STATUS
So far in our discussion of status, we have seen the 3 forms of status, ‫ رفع نصب جر‬, show themselves in
many different ways. The following chart is a summary of the different ways we see the 3 forms of
status:
Pronouns Ending Ending Ending Ending Ending Ending

(Independent vs Combination Combination Combination Sound Sound Sound
Attached) (Feminine (Masculine (Pair) (Partly- (Non- (Fully
Plural) Plural) Flexible) Flexible) Flexible)
ٌ َ ُ ‫ُم ْو َ ى‬
‫هو‬ ‫ُم ْس ِلمات‬ ‫ُم ْس ِل ُم ْون‬ ‫مان‬
ِ ‫مس ِل‬
ْ ُ ‫يُ ْو ُسف‬ ‫س‬ ‫ُم ْس ِل ٌم‬ ‫رفع‬
ُ َ ْ ‫ُم ْسلم‬ َْ ْ ُ َ ‫ُم ْو َ ى‬
‫ـه‬- ‫ُم ْس ِلمات‬ ‫ي‬ ِِ ‫ي‬ِ ‫مس ِلم‬ ‫يُ ْو ُسف‬ ‫س‬ ‫ُم ْس ِل ًما‬ ‫نصب‬
‫ـه‬- ‫ُم ْس ِلمات‬ ‫ي‬ ِِ ‫ي‬ ِ ‫مس ِلم‬ ‫يُ ْو ُسف‬ ‫س‬ ‫ُم ْس ِلم‬ ‫جر‬
20 | P a g e
**Remember the whole objective behind our study of the ways status is shown is so that we can
accurately and confidently identify whether a word is ‫ رفع‬, ‫ نصب‬, or ‫جر‬.**
2.6 STATUS IN ACTION
Before we continue on to the remaining 3 properties of an Ism, we are going to pause for a moment and
learn some fragments that will help us put our knowledge of status into action. Learning these
fragments will also allow us to solve the problem of words that look the same in the ‫ نصب‬and ‫ جر‬forms.
Once we learn these fragments we will know when to expect a word to be ‫ نصب‬and when we should
expect a word to be ‫جر‬.
WHAT IS A FRAGMENT?
َّ ُ
A fragment (‫)م َركبَة ناقِ َصة‬ is less than a sentence but more than a word. A fragment is formed when two or
more words come together but do not form a complete thought. The words in a fragment have a
relationship with each other. Sometimes this relationship is between a ‫ حرف‬and an ‫ اسم‬and sometimes it
is between an ‫ اسم‬and another ‫اسم‬. There are five basic fragments in the Arabic language. In order to
observe “status in action” we will begin with the first three fragments:
ْ َ ُ
1) ‫والمج ُر ْو ُر‬ ‫اجلار‬
‫ حرف‬+ ‫ اسم‬fragments
2) ‫واس ُمها‬ ْ ‫انل ْصب‬َّ ‫َح ْر ُف‬
ِ
َُ
3) ‫اإلضافة‬ ِ ‫ اسم‬+ ‫ اسم‬fragment
The first two fragments mentioned are fragments in which the relationship is a relationship between a
‫ حرف‬and an ‫اسم‬. The remaining fragment is between an ‫ اسم‬and another ‫اسم‬.
2.7 ‫اجلار واملجرور‬

This fragment is made up of two parts. The first is what is called ‫ حرف جر‬or a ‫جار‬. This is a ‫ حرف‬that puts
the ‫ اسم‬that comes after it in the ‫ جر‬status. The second is an ‫ اسم‬that follows and is in the ‫ جر‬status. This
part is called the ‫َمرور‬. This is the first of two reasons for a word to be in ‫ جر‬status. Nothing can come
between a ‫ جار‬and a ‫ – َمرور‬the two parts of this fragment cannot have a long-distance relationship. Also
know that a ‫ حرف جر‬can only affect an ‫اسم‬. It is never followed by a ‫ فعل‬or a ‫حرف‬. There are seventeen
‫حروف اجلر‬. Once you memorize them, recognizing and constructing ‫ اجلار واملجرور‬is very easy.
MEMORIZE the ‫ حروف‬below along with their meanings.

َ َ َ
I swear by ‫َو‬ For (possession) ‫لـ‬ Like (comparison) ‫كـ‬ I swear (by Allah only) ‫ تـ‬With ‫بَـ‬
21 | P a g e
َ ْ ُْ
Except ‫خال‬ Since ‫ُمذ‬ Since/For ‫ُمنذ‬
Except ‫َعدا‬ From ‫ِم ْن‬ Except ‫حاشا‬ Maybe ‫ُر َّب‬
َ َ
To/Towards ‫إِىل‬ Until ‫َح َّّت‬ On/Upon/Against ‫َع‬ About/Away from ‫ع ْن‬ In ِْ
‫ف‬
***N OTE that all the letters in the top row attach directly to the word following it.
َ ْ‫ َفت‬when it comes before all attached pronouns
***N OTE The ‫ لـ‬takes ‫ كرسة‬usually, but it takes a ‫حة‬
(except for the ‫ي‬, the attached version of ‫)أنا‬.
Remember that the ‫ حرف جر‬makes the ‫ اسم‬after it ‫جر‬. Let’s look back at the different ways the ‫ جر‬status
shows itself:

(Attached) Combination Combination Combination Sound Sound Sound
(Feminine (Masculine (Pair) (Partly- (Non- (Fully
‫ـه‬- ‫ُم ْس ِلمات‬ ‫ي‬ ِِ ‫ي‬
ِ ‫مس ِلم‬ ‫يُ ْو ُسف‬ ‫س‬ ‫ُم ْس ِلم‬ ‫جر‬
Let us take a look at a few examples of ‫ حروف جر‬from the Quran.
َ ََْ َ ‫الس‬
َّ ‫عن‬ ْ َ َ
‫نلا‬ ‫ِف أدن‬ ‫اع ِة‬ ‫َص‬
ِ ‫والع‬
‫جار‬
attached
Non-flexible, ‫جار‬ ‫جمرور‬ ‫جار‬ ‫جمرور‬ ‫جار‬
pronoun
but still ‫جمرور‬
‫فتحة = جمرور‬
on ‫لـ‬
➢ DRILL 6 Are the following ‫ جار وَمرور‬fragments? If they are, underline the ‫ جار‬and circle the
‫َمرور‬.
ْ ُ َ َ ْ َ َ
Y / N ‫رس‬
ِ ‫م ع الع‬ Y / N ‫ح َّّت َم ْط ل ِع الف ج ِر‬
َ Y / N ‫ج ي ْل‬
ِّ ‫جار ة م ْن س‬
ِ ِ
َ ‫ِب‬ِِ
ْ ْ َ ََ ُ ْ ْ َ ْ َ
Y / N ‫ي‬ِ ‫ك‬ ِ ‫َع ط عامِ ال ِم س‬ Y / N ‫ك َع ص ف َم أ ك ْو ل‬ Y / N ‫َم ْن أ ع َط ى‬
22 | P a g e
ََْ ْ َ ُ ِّ ُ ْ
Y / N ‫ال‬
ِ ‫ع ن األ ن‬
‫ف‬ Y / N ‫لُِك ه َم َز ة‬ Y / N ‫ِفْ َم ع ِز ل‬
َ َ ْ ِّ َ ْ
Y / N ‫يات‬
ِ ‫والع ا ِد‬ Y / N ‫َب ع د اَّل ك ِر‬ Y / N ‫لل‬
ِ ‫تا‬
2.8 ‫حرف انلصب واسمها‬

This fragment is made up of two parts. The first is what is called ‫حرف انلصب‬. This is a ‫ حرف‬that puts the
‫ اسم‬that comes after it in the ‫ نصب‬status. The second is an ‫ اسم‬that follows and is in the ‫ نصب‬status.
Unlike the ‫جار وَمرور‬, the two parts of this fragment can have a long-distance relationship. In cases where
the ‫ اسم‬directly follows the ‫حرف انلصب‬, this fragment is very easy to spot and construct. In cases where
something does come between the two parts (always a ‫ جار وَمرور‬or a special ‫)مضاف‬, simply look for the
first word in the ‫ نصب‬status and ignore everything in between. Remember that EVERY ‫ حرف انلصب‬NEEDS
AN ‫اسم‬. You will NEVER find a ‫ حرف نصب‬alone.
MEMORIZE the ‫ حروف انلصب‬and their meanings.
َ َّ
However ‫ك َّن‬ ِ ‫ل‬ Certainly ‫ِإن‬
َّ َ َّ َ
So that, hopefully, maybe ‫ل َعل‬ That ‫أن‬
َّ َ َّ َ َ
Because ‫بِأن‬ As though ‫كأن‬
َّ َ َ ْ‫َيل‬
Because ‫ِألن‬ If only ‫ت‬
***Note that if the ‫ حرف‬ends in a ‫ ن‬and it is followed by an attached pronoun that begins with a ‫نا( ن‬/‫)ِن‬, the two
َّ ِّ ْ ‫إ َِّن‬.
‫ ن‬can merge or remain separate. For example ‫ ِِن‬+ ‫ إِن‬can become ‫ إ ِ ِْن‬or ‫ن‬ِ
Remember that the ‫ حرف انلصب‬makes the ‫ اسم‬after it ‫نصب‬. Let’s look back at the different ways the ‫نصب‬
status shows itself:

ِ ‫مس ِلم‬ ‫يُ ْو ُسف‬ ‫س‬ ‫ُم ْس ِل ًما‬ ‫نصب‬
Let us take a look at a few examples of ‫ حروف انلصب‬from the Quran.
‫ جار وجمرور‬comes in between
‫اسمه‬ ‫حرف نصب‬
23 | P a g e
َ َ
ً‫أ َّن ل َ ُه ْم أ ْجرا‬ َ‫ِف َعنْها‬ َ َّ َ َ َ ‫إ َّن‬
ٌّ ِ ‫ك َح‬ ‫كأن‬ ‫كيْ ٌم‬
ِ
َ ‫الل َعليْ ٌم‬
‫ح‬ ِ ِ
➢ DRILL 7 Are the following ‫ حرف انلصب واسمها‬fragments? If so, circle the ‫ حرف انلصب‬and
underline its ‫اسم‬.
َّ َ َ ُ َُ ْ َ
Y / N ‫أ ن ُه ْم‬ Y / N ‫يل ْتَ ِن‬ Y / N ‫أ ن ت ق ْو ل وا‬
ََ ْ َ َ ‫إن‬َّ ُ ‫ِيل َ ْع لَ َم‬ َ
Y / N ‫الص فا والم رو ة‬ Y / N ‫الل‬ Y / N ‫َلُ َو ِيل ًّا‬
ُ ْ َ َ َّ َّ َ َ َّ َ َ
Y / N ‫إِن ه َو‬ Y / N ‫اع ة‬ ‫ل ع ل الس‬ Y / N ‫ك أ ن ُه ْم‬
َ َّ
‫إِن ه ذا‬
َ َ ْ َّ َ َ َّ
‫إِن َع ل يْك الل ع ن ة‬ ‫اس‬ ِ َّ‫ْث انل‬ َ َ ‫َو ل َك َّن أ َ ْك‬
Y / N Y / N Y / N ِ
2.9 ‫اإلضافة‬
MEANING AND PARTS
An ‫ إضافة‬is a construction that indicates possession or belonging. In English, belonging can be expressed
using the word “of”. For example, “the book of Allah” expresses possession and would be considered an
‫إضافة‬. This fragment is made up of two parts. The first is the word before the “of” and is called the ‫مضاف‬.
The word before “of” is that which is possessed. The second part is the word after the “of”. This is called
the ‫مضاف إيله‬. The word after “of” is the owner or the one who possesses.
the book of Allah
‫مضاف‬ ‫مضاف إيله‬
When you see a fragment that seems to indicate belonging but does not contain an “of,” the fragment
can be rearranged to make the “of” apparent. For example, “the cat’s paws” can be rearranged to read
“the paws of the cat.” The fragment “his eyes” can be rearranged to read “eyes of his”.
➢ DRILL 8 Underline the ‫ مضاف‬once and the ‫ مضاف إيله‬twice.
24 | P a g e
my ears a book of fiqh his opinions
the king of Persia their tears the capital of Malaysia
her strategy the king of the jungle our mother
THE GRAMMAR OF ‫اإلضافة‬

There are three grammatical conditions that an ‫ إضافة‬must meet.
1) The ‫ مضاف‬must be light

2) The ‫ مضاف‬cannot have an ‫ال‬
3) The ‫ مضاف إيله‬must be in the ‫ جر‬status
Also know that nothing can come between a ‫ مضاف‬and ‫مضاف إيله‬.
**Remember, there are times when a partly-flexible word can be made fully flexible by showing a ‫كرسة‬
in the ‫ جر‬form. A partly-flexible word can be made fully-flexible in two ways:
1) by adding an ‫ال‬
2) by making it a ‫مضاف‬
Remember that the ‫ مضاف إيله‬must be ‫جر‬. Let’s look back at the different ways the ‫ جر‬status shows itself:

ِ ‫مس ِلم‬ ‫يُ ْو ُسف‬ ‫س‬ ‫ُم ْس ِلم‬ ‫جر‬
Let us look at a few examples.

ُْ َُ
- followed by ‫جر‬ ‫لل‬
ِ ‫رسول ا‬ - light
- no ‫ال‬
the Prophet of Allah
ْ ُ
‫َو ُجنُ ْود ِإب ْ ِلي َس‬
- partly-flexible word, - light
shows ‫ جر‬with a ‫فتحة‬ - no ‫ال‬
the soldiers of Iblis
25 | P a g e
َ
‫ق ْو ُم ُم ْوس‬
- non-flexible word
- light
cannot show status
- no ‫ال‬
the people of Musa

Note that when a partly or non-flexible word is preceded by a word that is light and has no ‫ال‬, it is likely an ‫إضافة‬, even if
the status of the word is not clear.
‫َر َّبنا‬
- attached pronoun as
- light
‫مضاف إيله‬
- no ‫ال‬
- followed by ‫جر‬
attached pronoun our Master
Note that a pronoun attached to an ‫ اسم‬always makes an ‫إضافة‬.
- light by dropping the ‫ن‬

َ َّ
‫ُم ْس ِل ُمو َمكة‬
- partly-flexible word,
- no ‫ال‬
shows ‫ جر‬with a ‫فتحة‬
- followed by ‫جر‬
the Muslims of Mecca
Recall that there are very few reasons to make something light. If you see an ‫ اسم‬that is light with no ‫ال‬
followed directly by another ‫اسم‬, chances are it is an ‫إضافة‬, even if you cannot be completely sure that
the word after it is in the ‫ جر‬status. This is the second of two reasons for a word to be in ‫ جر‬status.
You may also recall that the ‫ إضافة‬construction was referenced in passing a few times in previous chapters.
Now that you know what an ‫ إضافة‬is, let us reiterate and relearn these rules.
1) One of the four scenarios in which a word is made light is when it is a ‫مضاف‬
2) One of the scenarios in which a partly-flexible word is made fully-flexible is when it is a ‫مضاف‬
‫ إضافة‬C H A I N S
Take a look at the fragment “my mother’s food” or “the food of the mother of mine.” Notice that in this
fragment, the word “of” appears twice. The presence of more than one “of” creates what we call an
‫ إضافة‬chain. In this chain, the middle word “mother” is a ‫ مضاف إيله‬to the word before it “food” and a
26 | P a g e
‫ مضاف‬to the word after it “mine”. In a chain, any word that appears between two other words serves as
a ‫ مضاف إيله‬to the word before it and a ‫ مضاف‬to the word after it.
- ‫جمرور‬, light, no ‫ال‬. It is functioning as both a ‫ مضاف‬and a ‫مضاف إيله‬
‫اَلي ْ ِن‬
ِّ ِ‫َمالك يَ ْوم‬ - light
- followed by ‫جر‬ ِ ِ - no ‫ال‬
the Master of the Day of Judgement
- ‫جمرور‬, light, no ‫ال‬: both a ‫ مضاف‬and a ‫مضاف إيله‬
َْ
‫أم ِر َر ِّب ِه‬
- attached pronoun as - light
‫مضاف إيله‬ - no ‫ال‬
his Master’s command
‫جمرور‬, light, no ‫ال‬ ‫جمرور‬, light, no ‫ال‬
َ َ ْ ‫ذ ْك ُر َر‬
‫َح ِة َر ِّبك‬ ِ
- attached pronoun as - light
‫مضاف إيله‬ - no ‫ال‬
the mention of the mercy of your Master
When determining whether something is an ‫ إضافة‬or not, put it to a three-question test:
1) Is the first word light?

2) Does the first word have NO ‫?ال‬
3) Is the second word ‫?َمرور‬
If the answer to all three of these questions is “yes,” it is an ‫إضافة‬. Otherwise, it is not.
→ Remember that the ‫ مضاف‬can be in any status.
→ Remember that partly-flexible words take a ‫ فتحة‬in the ‫ جر‬status.
27 | P a g e
→ Remember that non-flexible words cannot show their ‫جر‬. If the first word looks like a ‫مضاف‬,
assume that the non-flexible word that follows it is a ‫مضاف إيله‬.
➢ DRILL 9 Are the following ‫ إضافة‬fragments? If they are, label the ‫“ مضاف‬M” and the ‫مضاف إيله‬
“MI”.
َ ُ ُ َْ ْ
Y / N ‫ُم ْر ِس ل و انلَّاق ِة‬ Y / N ‫َع ص ف م أ ك و ل‬
ْ Y / N ‫لل‬ ُ
ِ ‫ِك تاب ا‬
ٌ ْ َ َ ْ ُ َ
Y / N ‫بال‬
ِ ‫اكجل‬
ِ ‫موج‬ Y / N ‫ِع ن د َر بِّ ِه ْم‬ Y / N ‫ق ْو َم ي ُ ْو ن َس‬
َْ َ َ َ
Y / N ‫أ م ِر َر ب ِّ ِه‬ Y / N َ ‫ج‬
‫اء اِل َق‬ Y / N ‫ِم ْن ق ْو مِ ُم ْوس‬
ُ ٌ ‫ك‬ ْ َ َ ْ َ
ُ ْ‫غ ي‬
Y / N ‫تاب َم ْر ق ْو ٌم‬ ِ Y / N ‫َب ع د اَّل ِِك رى‬ Y / N ‫موات‬
ِ
َّ ‫ب‬
‫الس‬
S P E C I A L ‫مضاف‬
There is a handful of words in Arabic that always appear as ‫ مضاف‬but do not necessarily create the
meaning of belonging or possession. MEMORIZE them along with their meanings.
between
َ ْ َ‫ب‬
‫ي‬ in front of
َ َ‫أ‬
‫مام‬ above
َ َ
‫ف ْوق‬
around/surrounding
َ
‫َح ْول‬ behind ‫خلف‬
َْ َ
under ‫ت‬َ ْ‫ََت‬
َْ َ ‫قَ َّد‬ َ َ
with/at/by ‫ِعند‬ right in front of ‫ام‬ before ‫قبْل‬
َ ْ
with/in support of ‫َم َع‬ far behind َ ‫َو‬
‫راء‬ after ‫َبعد‬
ْ َ َ َ ُ
especially from ‫ِم ْن َُلن‬ in the presence of ‫ََلى‬ besides/other
than/less than
‫دون‬
The words above remain ‫ منصوب‬unless preceded by a ‫حرف جر‬. The Arabic term for these special ‫ مضاف‬is
َ ْ َ
‫ظ ْرف‬. Note that ‫ َُلن‬is always preceded by a ‫ ِم ْن‬. The ‫ ِم ْن‬is a ‫حرف جر‬. Together ‫ َلن‬and ‫ من‬they make a ‫ظرف‬.
ٌ ْ َ ٌّ ُ
some of ‫َبعض‬ any, which ‫أ ٌّي‬ all, each, every ‫ك‬
like
ُْ
‫ِمثل‬ the same ‫نف ُس‬
َْ
other than, non
ُ ْ ‫َغ‬
‫ي‬
The above special ‫ مضاف‬do not denote time or place and can appear in any status.
28 | P a g e
‫األسماء اخلمسة‬
There are five special ‫ اسم‬that commonly appear as ‫مضاف‬. They are special in that when they appear as
‫ مضاف‬they do not show their status through an ending sound. Rather, they show their status through
the letter that corresponds with each ending ‫حركة‬.
This means that if the word is:
❖ ‫مرفوع‬, it would normally end in a ‫ضمة‬, then in the case of these special five words, it would
end in a ‫واو‬.
❖ ‫ منصوب‬and would normally end in a ‫فتحة‬, it ends in an ‫ألف‬.
❖ ‫ َمرور‬and would normally end in a ‫كرسة‬, it ends in a ‫ياء‬.
Remember that this only occurs when these words appear as ‫مضاف‬. When they do not appear as ‫مضاف‬,
they look like any other ‫ اسم‬and display their status like any other ‫اسم‬.
AS ‫مضاف‬
MEANING NON ‫مضاف‬ ‫جر‬ ‫نصب‬ ‫رفع‬

َ َ َ َ
father ‫أ ٌب‬ ْ ‫أ‬
‫ب‬ ِ ‫أبا‬ ‫أبُ ْو‬
ٌ َ َ َ ُ َ
brother ‫أخ‬ ْ‫أ ِخ‬ ‫أخا‬ ‫أخ ْو‬
َ َُ
father-in-law ‫َح ٌم‬ ‫م‬ْ ِ ‫َح‬ ‫َحا‬ ‫َح ْو‬
َ ُ
mouth ‫ف ٌم‬ ْ ِ
‫ف‬ ‫فا‬ ‫ف ْو‬
ُ
possessor of --- ‫ِذ ْي‬ ‫ذا‬ ‫ذ ْو‬
Notice that the last word in the table does not have a non ‫ مضاف‬version. This is because this word only
َ ُ
ever appears as a ‫مضاف‬. The feminine version of this word is ‫ذات‬/
ِ ‫ذات‬/‫ذات‬. This version also only appears
as a ‫ ;مضاف‬however, it displays its status in a normal way.
َ ‫إ َىل ذ ي‬ ُ َ َ َ َْ َ
ً‫اه ْم ُش َع يْب ا‬ ْ َ ُ ُ َ
R/N/J ‫الع ْر ِش‬ ِ ِ R/N/J ‫مدين أخ‬ R/N/J ‫الع ِظ يْ ِم‬
َ ‫ضل‬
ِ ‫والل ذ و الف‬
29 | P a g e
َ ُ َ ُ ََ ُ ُ َُ ُ َ ُ َ َ
R/N/J ‫اكن ذا ق ْر ب‬ R/N/J
ُ‫خ ْوه‬ ‫ل ي س ف وأ‬ R/N/J ‫ب ِأ خ ل ك ْم ِم ْن أ بِيْك ْم‬
➢ DRILL 10 Underline the ‫ مضاف‬once and the ‫ مضاف إيله‬twice. Determine the status of the
‫مضاف‬
30 | P a g e
CHAPTER 3 & 4 MEMORIZATION
The following are vocabulary words that you are responsible for from the chapter.
CHAPTER VOCABULARY
ْ َ ْ َ َ َ َْ َ ْ َ‫أ‬ ْ َ
َ ْ ‫ َخ‬- ‫خ ََض‬ َ َ
‫ َصف َراء‬-‫صفر‬ ‫أ‬ ‫ َس ْوداء‬- ‫أ ْس َود‬ ‫ْحر – ْح َراء‬ ‫َضاء‬ ‫أ‬ ‫أبْ َيض – َبيْضاء‬
yellow black red green white
َْ َ َ ْ َ َْ َ ْ َ‫أ‬ َ ْ َ
‫أ ْز َرق – زرقاء‬ ‫أك َب‬ ‫أكث‬ ‫ح َسن‬ ‫أعظم‬
blue bigger more better greater
ْ َ َ َ َ َْ َْ َْ َ
‫أبْكم – بكم‬ ‫أ َصم – صم‬ ‫أظلم‬ ‫أق َرب‬ ‫أعلم‬
mute deaf more unjust closer more knowing
ْ‫أَ ْع ََم – عَم‬ َ
‫ق َدم‬
َ ْ ‫ر‬
‫جل – أ ْرجل‬
َ
‫ أيْد‬- ‫يَد‬
ْ َ ْ
‫عي ْون‬/‫َعي – أعي‬
ِ
blind foot leg hand eye/spring
َْ َْ َ َ
‫دار – دِيَار‬ ‫ أنفس‬- ‫نفس‬ ‫َح ْرب‬ ‫أ ْرض‬ ‫ آذان‬- ‫أذن‬
house person war land ear
ْ ْ‫ َسعِي‬/‫َج َه َّنم‬ َ
‫ َط ِريق‬/‫َسبِيْل‬ ‫َسماء – َسموات‬
َ َ ‫ رِ َياح‬- ‫رِيْح‬ ‫ش ْمس‬
path hellfire sky wind sun
َ َْ َْ
‫ناس – أناس‬ ‫َعصا‬ ‫كأس‬ ‫نار‬ ‫َخر‬
a people staff cup fire alcohol
َ َْ َ َ ْ َْ َْ
‫ق ْرن – قر ْون‬ ‫آل‬ ‫ق ْوم – أقوام‬
َ ‫ح ِْزب‬ ‫ أهلون‬- ‫أهل‬
a generation family/people a nation a faction family/people
*Lines 1-2, the word after the dash “-“ is the feminine version
*Lines 3-end, the word after the dash “-“ is the plural version and the slash “/” indicates a synonymous meaning
C O M M O N ‫صفات‬
ٌ ْ ‫َكب‬
‫ي‬ ٌ ْ ‫َصغ‬
‫ي‬ ٌ ْ‫قَري‬
)‫ب (من‬
ٌ
)‫بَ ِعيْد (عن‬
ِ ِ ِ
big small close far
ُ‫َش ِديْ ٌد – أَ ِش َّداء‬ ٌ َ
‫َجيْل‬
ِ ٌ ْ ‫َكث‬
‫ي‬
ٌ َ
‫ق ِليْل‬
ِ
intense beautiful many/a lot few/little
َ
‫أ ِيلْ ٌم‬ ‫ي‬ٌ ْ ‫ُمب‬ ُ ‫ ُك َر‬- ‫َكريْ ٌم‬
‫ماء‬ ‫ب‬ٌ ِّ‫َطي‬
ِ ِ
painful clear noble/generous pure/good
ْ َ ٌ
‫َع ِزيْ ٌز‬ ‫ق ِدي ٌم‬ ‫َج ِديْد‬ ‫َع ِظيْ ٌم‬
mighty/respected old new great
‫كيْ ٌم‬ َ
ِ ‫ح‬ ُ‫َض ِعيْ ٌف – ُض َع َفاء‬ ُ‫قَو ٌّي – أَقْو َياء‬ َ َ ‫َرحيْ ٌم – ُر‬
ُ‫َحاء‬ ِ
ِ ِ
wise weak strong merciful
31 | P a g e
CHAPTER 3 – ‫ القسم‬- ‫ العدد‬-‫اجلنس‬
INTRODUCTION
Remember every ‫ اسم‬has four properties. Their four properties are status (‫)اإلعراب‬, gender (‫)الجنس‬,
number (‫)العدد‬, and type (‫)القسم‬. We spent a lot of time focusing on status (‫ )اإلعراب‬as it is unique to the
Arabic language and the most extensive of the 4 properties.
In this chapter, we will complete our study of the 4 properties of an ‫اسم‬.
Remember not to lose sight of where we are in our studies.
Gender ‫جنس‬
‫اسم‬
Language
Number ‫عدد‬
Sentences Fragments Words ‫حرف‬
3.1 GENDER – ‫اجلنس‬
Gender ‫جنس‬
‫اسم‬
Words
Number ‫عدد‬
‫حرف‬
Gender is the second of the four properties of the ‫اسم‬. Every word in the Arabic language is either
masculine (‫ )مذَ َّكر‬or feminine (‫)م َؤنَّث‬. The DEFAULT GENDER for an ‫ اسم‬is MASCULINE . There are six categories
of feminine words. If a word does not fall into one of these six categories, it is masculine.
1) BIOLOGICALLY FEMININE
This refers to words that are feminine by nature.
32 | P a g e
ْ
Sister ‫أخت‬
Mother ‫أم‬
َ
Cow ‫َبق َرة‬
2) WORDS THAT END IN ‫ ة‬OR ‫ اء‬OR ‫ى‬
When a word has THREE LETTERS and those three letters are followed by ‫ اء‬or ‫ى‬, the word is
considered feminine. In the word ‫ ِذ ْك َرى‬for example, there are three letters before the ‫ى‬. This word is
feminine. In the word ‫هدًى‬, on the other hand, there are only two letters before the ‫ى‬. This word is
not considered feminine. As for the ‫ة‬, almost all words that end in a ‫ ة‬are feminine.
‫ة‬ ‫اء‬ ‫ى‬

َ ْ ‫َر‬
‫ْحة‬ ‫ْحراء‬
َْ ْ
‫الكبى‬
ْ
‫َصالة‬ ‫َس ْوداء‬ ‫العلىي‬
3) BODY PARTS IN PAIRS
Body parts that come in pairs are feminine, both in the dual and singular forms.
َ َ
lip ‫شفة‬ ear ‫أذ ن‬ hand ‫يَد‬
َ ْ َْ
foot ‫ق َدم‬ leg ‫رِجل‬ eye ‫عي‬
َ َ
shin ‫ساق‬ cheek ‫خد‬ elbow ‫م ِْرفق‬
ْ َ َ ْ
ankle ‫كعب‬ heel ‫عقِب‬ shoulder ‫َمنكِب‬
4) SPECIFIC NAMES OF PLACES
Most specific names of places are feminine. The word “school” or “masjid” is not a specific name of
a place.
ْ ْ َْ
Egypt ‫مِص‬ Sudan ‫الس ْودان‬ America ‫أم ِريكا‬
ْ َ َْ َّ
Morocco ‫المغ ِرب‬ Yathrib ‫ثب‬ ِ ‫ي‬ Makkah ‫َمكة‬
There are few exceptions to this rule.
5) NON-HUMAN PLURALS
33 | P a g e
All non-human plurals are considered feminine. This holds true regardless of the gender of the
singular form. Take a look at the chart below. The singular form of ‫ سيارات‬is ‫( سيارة‬f). The singular
form of ‫ مساجد‬is ‫( مسجد‬m), and the singular form of ‫ كتب‬is ‫( كتاب‬m).
Cars َ ‫َس َّي‬

‫ارات‬
‫جد‬ َ
Masjids ِ ‫مسا‬
Books ‫ك تب‬
6) FEMININE BECAUSE THE ARABS SAID SO
There is a set of words that do not fall into any of the categories above and are feminine only
because the Arabs decided to treat them as such. The Arabic term for this is ُ‫سماعِي‬ ٌ َّ‫م َؤن‬.
َ ُ‫ث‬
َ
Land ‫أ ْرض‬ War ‫َح ْرب‬
Wind ‫رِيْح‬ Sky ‫َسماء‬
ْ َ
Well ‫بِئ‬ Sun ‫ش ْمس‬
َْ
House ‫دار‬ Person ‫نفس‬
َْ
Cup ‫كأس‬ Fire ‫نار‬
َْ َْ
Wine ‫َخر‬ Bucket ‫دلو‬
Hellfire ‫َج َه َّنم‬ Path ‫َسبِيْل‬
ْ
Hellfire ‫َس ِعي‬ Path ‫َط ِريْق‬
َ
Staff ‫عصا‬
The following story will help you remember these words and their definitions.
During a ‫ حرب‬a soldier was daydreaming, looking up at the ‫ سماء‬until the ‫ شمس‬came up.
When he snapped out of it, he realized that he was the only ‫ نفس‬left on the battlefield. He
was surrounded by ‫نار‬, so he used a ‫ دلو‬full of water to make a ‫ سبيل‬and ‫ طريق‬for himself to a
safer ‫أرض‬. In the hot, blowing ‫ريح‬, he was desperately looking for a ‫ بئر‬to draw more water
from. In his search, he found an empty ‫ دار‬inside which there was a ‫ كأس‬full of ‫خمر‬. He
remembered his fear of ‫ جهنم‬and ‫السعير‬, and he used his ‫ عصا‬to strike the drink.
➢ DRILL 1 What is the gender of the following words? Why?
R EASON G ENDER WORD R EASON G ENDER WORD

ُ ‫ َص ْف‬.1 ٌ
M/F ‫راء‬ M/F ‫ َحا ِميَة‬.2
34 | P a g e
ُ ُ َْْ َ
M/F ‫ ظل َمات‬.3 M/F ‫ي‬ ِ ‫ عين‬.4
َ َّ
M/F ‫ اِل ُ ْس َن‬.5 M/F ‫ َمكة‬.6
َْ ْ ُ َ َ
M/F ‫ي‬
ِ ‫ مؤ ِمن‬.7 M/F ‫ أبْك ُم‬.8
M/F ‫ َع َصا‬.9 M/F ‫ َصابِ ًرا‬.10
3.2 NUMBER – ‫العدد‬
Gender ‫جنس‬
‫اسم‬
Words
Number ‫عدد‬
‫حرف‬
The third property of the ‫ اسم‬is number. All words in Arabic have a singular version (ُ‫)م ْف َر ٌد‬, a pair version
(‫ )مثَنَّى‬and a plural version (ُ‫) َجم ٌع‬. The singular and pair are standard and easy to recognize. They are the
first and second columns of the ‫ مسلم‬chart. When it comes to plurals, however, there are four types. They
are:
َّ َ
1) The sound masculine plural – ‫اجل ْمع المذكر السال ِم‬
َ
َّ َ
2) The sound feminine plural – ‫اجل ْمع المؤنث السال ِم‬
َ
ْ َ َْ
3) The broken plural – ‫س ْي‬
ِ ‫َجع تك‬
َْ ْ
4) The plural by meaning – ‫اسم َجع‬
THE SOUND MASCULINE PLURAL

The sound masculine plural refers to the third column in the masculine version of the ‫ مسلم‬chart
(‫ي‬ َ ْ ‫ ُم ْسلم‬،‫)م ْسل ُم ْو َن‬.
َ ْ ‫ ُم ْسلم‬،‫ي‬ ُ This type of plural is used only for beings of intellect. This includes humans,
ِِ ِِ ِ
angels (‫)المالئكة‬, and jinn. Even though this type of plural is known as the sound masculine plural, it is
also used for mixed groups that include both men and women.
This type of plural is known as a sound plural because the original make-up of the word remains sound.
That is to say the original form of the word does not change. The ‫ين‬/‫ ون‬endings are simply added onto
the singular version without affecting its form.
THE SOUND FEMININE PLURAL
ٌ
The sound feminine plural refers to the third column in the feminine version of the ‫ مسلم‬chart ( ،‫ُم ْس ِلمات‬
‫مات‬ ْ ُ ْ ُ
ٍ ‫ مس ِل‬،‫مات‬
ٍ ‫)مس ِل‬. This type of plural is used for both beings of intellect and inanimate objects. It cannot
be used to refer to mixed groups (a group made up of both men and women).
35 | P a g e
This type of plural is known as a sound plural because the original make-up of the word remains sound.
ٌ
The ‫ات‬ٍ /‫ ات‬endings are simply added onto the singular version without affecting its form.
BROKEN PLURALS
Broken plurals are plurals in which the original make-up of the word is broken. In English, generally, to
create a plural, an “s” is added to the end of the word and the original word remains unchanged. For
example, “book” becomes “books” and “house” becomes “houses”. There are some words, however,
that do not follow this pattern. The plural of “goose”, for instance is “geese”. The plural of “tooth” is
“teeth”, and the plural of “mouse” is “mice”.
ٌ َ َ
In a similar way, in many cases in Arabic, an ending combination (‫ات‬ ٍ /‫ات‬/‫ين‬/‫ )ون‬can be added to the
singular version of a word to make it plural. There are some cases, however, where the original form of
the ‫ اسم‬is broken. The plural of ‫ َم ْس ِجد‬for example, is ‫ساجد‬ َ
ِ ‫م‬. The ‫ ا‬appears in the middle of the word inُ ُ
the plural version and breaks the original form of the word. Likewise, the plural of the word ‫تاب‬ ٌ ‫ ك‬is ‫ب‬
ٌ ‫كت‬.
ِ
In this case, the ‫ ا‬is eliminated and the ‫ حركات‬on the word change. The original form of the word does not
remain intact.
Because broken plurals do not have an ending combination that indicates that they are plural, they tend
to look like singular words. The only way to tell the difference between a singular word and a broken
plural is to know the definition or memorize the broken plural patterns. Below are some common
broken plural patterns that appear in the Quran.
‫المعىن‬ ‫َجع‬ ‫مفرد‬ ‫المعىن‬ ‫َجع‬ ‫مفرد‬

َْ
one of a
‫أزواج‬ ‫َز ْوج‬ witness ‫ش َهداء‬ ‫شاهِد‬
َ‫أَفْئدة‬
pair
َ ْ
emotional
ِ ‫فؤاد‬ blessing ‫ن َِعم‬ ‫ن ِع َمة‬
َ ْ َْ
heart
َ
woman ‫ن ِساء‬ ‫ا ِم َرأة‬ prophet ‫أنبِياء‬ ‫ن ِب‬
Notice that some broken plural patterns are partly-flexible and some are fully-flexible.
PLURAL BY MEANING
There are words that appear to be singular but are considered plural because they have a plural
meaning in that they refer to a group comprised of many members.
‫المعىن‬ ‫اللكمة‬ ‫المعىن‬ ‫اللكمة‬

ْ َ َ
an argumentative group ‫خصم‬ a nation ‫ق ْوم‬
a faction ‫ح ِْزب‬ a people ‫ناس‬
ْ َ
an army ‫جن د‬ a generation ‫ق ْرن‬
َْ
family/people ‫آل‬ family/people ‫أهل‬
36 | P a g e
THE GRAMMATICAL TREATMENT OF PLURALS
What is meant by “grammatical treatment” will become clearer when we study pronouns, pointing
words, fragments, and sentences. For now, memorize the rules below. There are two rules pertaining
to the grammatical treatment of plurals.
1) All non-human plurals are treated as SINGULAR FEMININE

ex.) ‫َس َّيارات‬
2) Everything else is treated “as is”:
a. The sound masculine human plural is treated as PLURAL MASCULINE
َ
ex.) ‫م ْسل ِم ْون‬
b. The sound feminine human plural is treated as PLURAL FEMININE
ex.) ‫م ْسل ِمات‬
c. Words that are plural by meaning are treated as PLURAL MASCULINE
َ
ex.) ‫ق ْوم‬
d. Human broken plurals are treated as PLURAL MASCULINE
ex.) ‫رسل‬
➢ DRILL 2 How are these words treated grammatically?
N UMBER G ENDER MEANING W ORD N UMBER G ENDER MEANING W ORD

ُ َ‫العل‬
‫ماء‬ ُ .1 ‫بال‬
S / 2 / PL M/F the scholars S / 2 / PL M/F the mountains ِ ‫اجل‬
ِ .2
ً ْ‫ أَن‬.3
‫هارا‬
َ
ُ ‫ أنْب‬.4
‫ياء‬
S / 2 / PL M/F rivers S / 2 / PL M/F prophets ِ
ٌ َ َْ ْ
S / 2 / PL M/F a sayer ‫ قائِل‬.5 S / 2 / PL M/F corrupters ‫ ُمف ِس ِدين‬.6
َ َّ
S / 2 / PL M/F the ship ‫الس ِفيْن ِة‬ .7 S / 2 / PL M/F ayahs ‫ آيات‬.8
ٌ ٌ
S / 2 / PL M/F hand ‫ يَد‬.9 S / 2 / PL M/F worshipping women ‫ اعبِدات‬.10
3.3 TYPE - ‫القسم‬
Gender ‫جنس‬
‫اسم‬
Words
Number ‫عدد‬
‫حرف‬
37 | P a g e
‫الضمائر‬
‫هم‬ ‫هما‬ ‫ه َو‬
‫ه َّن‬ ‫هما‬ ‫ه‬ َِ
ْ‫َأنْتم‬ َْ
‫أنتما‬ َ‫َأنْت‬
َّ‫َأنْت‬ َْ
‫أنتما‬ ‫ت‬
َْ
ِ ‫أن‬
َْ َ
‫َنن‬ ‫أنا‬
The fourth property of the ‫ اسم‬is type. Every word in the Arabic language is either common (‫ )نَك َِرة‬or
proper (‫) َم ْع ِرفَة‬. Common words are generic words that do not refer to something specific. Proper words
are specific. An example of a ‫معرفة‬/‫ نكرة‬pair would be “a girl,” which refers to an unspecified girl and
“Maryam,” which refers to a specific person. Another example of a ‫معرفة‬/‫ نكرة‬pair would be “a chair,”
which refers to an unspecified chair and “the chair,” which refers to a specific chair. C OMMON (‫ )نَك َِرة‬is
the DEFAULT for a word. There are seven categories of proper (‫ ) َم ْع ِرفَة‬words. Unless something falls under
one of these categories, it is assumed to be common (‫)نَك َِرة‬.
1) WORDS WITH ‫)الم اتلعريف( ال‬
The ‫ ال‬in Arabic means “the,” which makes a word specific.

As mentioned before, remember that ‫ تنوين‬and ‫ ال‬NEVER come together. For example, the word ‫المسل ٌُم‬
is incorrect. You can only say ُ‫المسلم‬.
**Remember, a partly-flexible word is made fully flexible in two ways:
a. by adding an ‫ال‬
b. by making it a ‫مضاف‬
2) SPECIFIC NAMES (‫)اسم علم‬
Specific names of people and places such as ُ‫ َح ْمزَ ة‬or ُ‫ َم َّكة‬are always ‫معرفة‬.
3) PRONOUNS (‫)الضمائر‬
Pronouns (he, she, they, we, etc.) are always ‫معرفة‬. The following are the ‫ ضمائر‬for recognition
purposes. We have discussed pronouns in detail previously.
4) POINTERS (‫)أسماء اإلشارة‬
Words used to point (this, that, those, these) are always ‫معرفة‬. Below are the ‫ أسماءُاإلشارة‬for
recognition purposes. We will learn their definitions and how to use them in a later chapter.
38 | P a g e
‫أسماء اإلشارة‬
َ َ َ َ
‫هؤال ِء‬ ‫ان‬
ِ ‫ه‬ ‫ذ‬ ‫هذا‬
َ ََ َ
‫هؤال ِء‬ ‫ان‬
ِ ‫هت‬ ِ ‫ه ِذه‬
َ َ َ َ َ
‫أ ْوالئِك‬ ‫ذان ِك‬ ‫ذل ِك‬
َ َ َ َ ْ
‫أ ْوالئِك‬ ‫تان ِك‬ ‫ت ِلك‬
5) ‫األسماء الموصولة‬
Below are the ‫ أسماءُموصولة‬for recognition purposes. We will learn their definitions and how to use
them in a later chapter.
‫األسماء الموصولة‬
َّ َ َّ ْ ‫َّاَّل‬
‫اَّل ِْي َن‬ ‫ان‬
ِ ‫اَّل‬ ‫ِي‬
َّ ْ َّ ْ َّ َ َّ ْ ‫َّال‬
‫االئ ِ ْي‬،‫وات‬ ِ ‫ال‬،‫اال ِت‬ ‫ان‬
ِ ‫اتل‬ ‫ت‬ ِ
‫َم ْن‬ ‫ما‬
6) THE ONE BEING CALLED (‫)المنادى‬

The ‫ حرف‬used to call a person is ‫يا‬. The word following ‫ يا‬is always ‫معرفة‬. This is because when calling
َ َ َْ
someone, you are addressing a specific person. So both the word ‫ َول‬in ‫ يا َول‬and the name ‫ ْح َزة‬in ‫يا‬
َْ
‫ ْح َزة‬are ‫معرفة‬.
7) IF THE ‫ مضاف إيله‬IS ‫معرفة‬, THE ‫ مضاف‬IS ALSO ‫معرفة‬.
The ‫ مضاف‬gets its type from the ‫مضافُإليه‬. If the ‫ مضافُإليه‬is proper, the ‫ مضاف‬is also proper. If the
‫ مضافُإليه‬is common, the ‫ مضاف‬is also common.
➢ DRILL 3 Are the following proper or common? Why?
R EASON T YPE WORD R EASON T YPE WORD

P/C ‫ ه َو‬.11 P/C َّ .12
‫السائ ِ ِل‬
P/C ‫ ه َدى‬.13 P/C ‫ َسبِيْال‬.14
ْ َ َ
P/C ‫ أك َرم‬.15 P/C ‫ هذا‬.16
َ َّ َ
P/C ‫ َمكة‬.17 P/C ‫ ُم َّمد‬.18
39 | P a g e
APPENDIX
Note that the meaning of ُ‫ كل‬changes depending on the number and type of the ‫مضافُإليه‬. Below are the
possible scenarios:
1) If the ‫ مضاف إيله‬is SINGULAR AND COMMON , the meaning is each and every
ex) ُ‫ – كلُ َمس ِْجد‬each and every masjid
2) If the ‫ مضاف إيله‬is SINGULAR AND PROPER , the meaning is the entire
ex) ‫ – كلُال َمس ِْج ُِد‬the entire masjid
3) If the ‫ مضاف إيله‬is PLURAL AND PROPER , the meaning is all of

ex) ‫ج ِد‬ َ
ِ ‫ – ُك المسا‬all of the masjids
➢ DRILL 4 Translate the following fragments. Use the word bank below.
َ
‫ – ث َم َرة‬fruit ‫ َط عام‬- food
َّ ‫ل‬ َّ
‫ُك أ َّم ة‬
ِ ‫ُك اثل َم‬
‫رات‬ ِ
َْ ‫ل‬ ْ َ ‫ل‬
‫ُك ن ف س‬
ِ ‫جد‬
ِ ‫ُك م س‬
ِ
َ ‫ل‬
َّ ‫ُك‬
‫الط عا ِم‬ ‫ُك ش ي ْ َط ان‬
ِ
40 | P a g e
Words
‫اسم‬ ‫حرف‬ ‫فعل‬
Status ‫إعراب‬ Number ‫عدد‬ Gender ‫جنس‬ Type ‫قسم‬
How to Singular Pair Plural

Statuses Heavy vs Light Flexibility Masculine Feminine Common Proper
tell status
a. ‫( رفع‬doer) a. ending i - biologically
Heavy Light
sound Non-human feminine a. has ‫ال‬
b. ‫نصب‬ b. ending
Human plurals:
plurals: ii - ending with ‫ة‬,
(detail) combination a. fully-flexible a. ‫ ات‬ending b. proper name
‫ى‬, ‫اء‬ c. one being called
c. ‫( جر‬after- a. partly- b. non-flexible (for feminine
- Can have ‫ات‬
flexible plural and iii - body parts in d. pronouns
of) c. partly flexible inanimate) ending
pairs
c. ‫مضاف‬ i - non-Arab names - Can be a e. pointing words
b. ‫ ون‬or ‫ين‬ iv - proper (‫)أسماء اإلشارة‬
broken plural
**‫ ال‬is allergic ii - feminine and ending (for names of places
uniquely masculine masculine f. ‫األسماء املوصولة‬
to ‫تنوين‬ names v - non-human
human plurals) ALWAYS treat plurals
as a singular g. If the word after
iii - proper names of c. Human
femine vi - feminine of is proper, then
places broken plurals: because the the word before of
(plural Arabs said so is proper
masculine) (BASS)
41 | P a g e
42 | P a g e
CHAPTER 4 – ‫ اسم‬IN ACTION
INTRODUCTION
Now that we have completed our study of the 4 properties of an ‫اسم‬, we can look at the remaining
fragments. Recall that we already covered three of the five fragments under “status in action.” The
remaining two fragments will require us to use our knowledge of all 4 properties of an ‫اسم‬.
Recall that the five fragments are:

ْ َ ُ
‫ حرف‬+ ‫ اسم‬fragments
5) ‫واس ُمها‬ ْ ‫انل ْصب‬ َّ ‫َح ْر ُف‬
ِ
َُ
6) ‫اإلضافة‬ ِ
ُ َ ِّ ُ
7) ‫الم ْو ُص ْوف والصفة‬ َ
‫ اسم‬+ ‫ اسم‬fragments
َ َ ُ ُ ْ
َ ‫اس ُم اإل‬
8) ‫شار إِيلْه‬‫شار ِة والم‬ِ
4.1 ‫املوصوف والصفة‬

This fragment is made up of two parts. The first is the ‫موصوف‬, an ordinary ‫اسم‬. The second is the ‫صفة‬, a
descriptive word (an adjective) that follows it. In Arabic, the adjective comes after the ‫اسم‬, whereas in
English, the adjective comes before the noun.
Grammatically, a ‫ موصوف‬must match with its ‫ صفة‬in all four properties.
ً ْ َ ً َ
‫ق ْوال ث ِقيال‬
‫الصفة‬ ‫الموصوف‬
Status: ‫نصب‬ Status: ‫نصب‬
Number: singular Number: singular
Gender: masculine Gender: masculine
Type: common A heavy word Type: common
‫الصفة‬ ْ ُ ُ َّ َّ ‫الموصوف‬
Status: ‫رفع‬ ‫الطامة الكْبى‬ Status: ‫رفع‬
Gender: feminine Gender: feminine
Type: proper The biggest calamity Type: proper
‫الموصوف‬
‫الصفة‬
ٌ َْ ُُ
‫َح ٌر ُم ْستن ِف َرة‬
Status: ‫رفع‬
Number: singular
Number: singular
Gender: feminine
Gender: feminine
Type: common
Type: common
Alarmed donkeys
recall that non-human plurals are
treated as singular feminine
43 | P a g e
‫الصفة‬ ‫الموصوف‬
Status: ‫نصب‬
َ
Status: ‫نصب‬
َ ْ ‫الق ْو َم الفاسق‬
‫ي‬
Number: plural
Number: plural
Gender: masculine ِ ِ Gender: masculine
Type: proper Type: proper
The corrupt nation recall that ‫ قوم‬is an ‫اسم َجع‬, so it is

treated as plural masculine
‫الصفة‬
ْ َُ
‫َحيَاتنا اَلنيَا‬
‫الموصوف‬
Status: ‫رفع‬ Status: ‫رفع‬
Our lowest life
The ‫ صفة‬gets an ‫ ال‬because the The fragment is proper because
‫ موصوف‬is proper the ‫ مضاف إيله‬is proper
Also keep in mind that an ‫ اسم‬that is inherently proper such as a pronoun, pointing word or ‫اسم موصول‬
cannot appear as a ‫موصوف‬.
➢ DRILL 1 Are the following ‫ موصوف وصفة‬fragments? Underline the ‫ موصوف‬once and the ‫صفة‬
twice.
ٌ ْ ‫خب‬ َ ُ َ ٌ َ ُ َْ َ ‫اِل َ ِّج األَ ْك‬

Y / N ‫ي‬ ِ ‫والل‬ Y / N ‫عام خ ال ِ َص ة‬ ‫األ ن‬ Y / N ‫ْب‬
ِ
َْ َ ُ َ ُْ َ َ ‫إ َىل ي َ ْو مِ الق‬
Y / N ‫َر ب ك ْم األ َع‬ Y / N ‫ق ْو ٌم َم ِر ُم ْو ن‬ Y / N ‫يام ِة‬ ِ ِ
ٌ
‫نار حا ِم يَة‬ٌ ‫ية‬ َ ْ ‫ب فا ِك َه ة َك ث‬ ‫تان‬
َ َّ َ ْ َ
Y / N Y / N ِ ِ Y / N ِ ‫نان ن ض اخ‬ ِ ‫عي‬
َ َْْ َ َْ ُ ْ َ َ
Y / N ‫َح َئ َم ْس نُ ْو ن‬ Y / N ‫ي‬
ِ ‫ي ي تِي م‬ ِ ‫لِ غ الم‬ Y / N ‫إِىل ق ْو ِم ِه ْم ُم ن ِذ ِر يِ َن‬
It is important to note that when the names of Allah appear in succession, they are not considered
‫ موصوف وصفة‬even though they match in all four properties. This is a common occurrence in the Quran.
Below are two such examples.
َّ ‫َو ُه َو‬ ٌ َ ٌّ َ ُ
‫الع ِليْ ُم‬
َ ‫السميْ ُع‬
ِ ‫َحيْد‬
ِ ‫والل غ ِن‬
4.2 ‫اسم اإلشارة واملشار إيله‬

This fragment is made up of two parts. The first is a pointing word, ‫اسم اإلشارة‬. The second is that which is
being pointed at, ‫املشار إيله‬. An example of such a fragment in English would be “that cow”. “That” would
be ‫ اسم اإلشارة‬and “cow” would be the ‫مشار إيله‬.
44 | P a g e
The grammatical rules for this fragment are as follows:
1) The ‫ اسم اإلشارة‬and the ‫ مشار إيله‬must MATCH IN ALL FOUR PROPERTIES .
2) The ‫ مشار إيله‬MUST HAVE AN ‫ ال‬ON IT
3) Nothing can come between ‫ اسم اإلشارة‬and its ‫مشار إيله‬.
Below are the ‫ أسماء اإلشارة‬used for pointing at something that is NEAR . MEMORIZE them along with their
meaning.
PLURAL PAIR SINGULAR

َ َ َ
‫ه ُؤال ِء‬ ‫ذان‬
ِ ‫ه‬ ‫هذا‬
masc.
these both of these this
َ َ َ
‫ه ُؤال ِء‬ ‫تان‬
ِ ‫ه‬ ‫ه ِذ ِه‬
fem.
these both of these this
Below are the ‫ أسماء اإلشارة‬used for pointing at something that is FAR . MEMORIZE them along with their
meaning.
َ ُْ
PLURAL PAIR SINGULAR
َ ‫ى‬ َ ‫ى‬
‫أوالئِك‬ ‫ذنِك‬ ‫ذلِك‬
masc.
َ ُْ
those both of those that
َ ‫ى‬ َ ْ
‫أوالئِك‬ ‫ت ِنك‬ ‫تِلك‬
fem.
those both of those that
Recall that the SINGULAR and PLURAL versions of pointers are NON- FLEXIBLE . The PAIR version, on the
other hand functions like the normal pair ending combination we know from the ‫ مسلم‬chart. Below are
the ‫ نصب‬and ‫ جر‬versions of the pair. MEMORIZE them.
‫جر‬/‫نصب‬ ‫رفع‬
َ ‫َ ى‬
‫ىهذي ْ ِن‬ ‫ان‬
ِ ‫ه‬ ‫ذ‬
َْ‫ى‬ ‫ى‬
‫ي‬ ِ ‫هت‬ ‫تان‬
ِ ‫ه‬
َ َ َ ‫ى‬
‫ذي ْ ِنك‬ ‫ذنِك‬
َ َْ َ ‫ى‬
‫تي ِنك‬ ‫ت ِنك‬
45 | P a g e
Let us take a look at a few examples.
َ َ
ُ ‫ك الك‬
‫المشار إيله‬
‫تاب‬ ِ ِ ‫ذل‬ ‫اسم اإلشارة‬
That book Type: proper
Type: proper
The word after the ‫ اسم اإلشارة‬has an ‫ال‬
ُ
‫ك الر ُسل‬
‫المشار إيله‬ ‫اسم اإلشارة‬
Number: plural
َُ ُِ‫أُ ُْوالئ‬ Status: ‫رفع‬
Number: plural
Type: proper Those prophets Type: proper
The word after the ‫ اسم اإلشارة‬has an ‫ال‬

َ َ
‫ه ُؤال ِء الق ْو ُم‬
Status: ‫رفع‬ Status: ‫رفع‬
Number: plural Number: plural
This nation
The word after the ‫ اسم اإلشارة‬has an ‫ال‬ note that the ‫ اسم إشارة‬is in ‫ رفع‬even though it
cannot show its status

Status: ‫رفع‬ ُ ُ Status: ‫رفع‬
Number: singular ‫هذا القرآن‬ Number: singular
This Quran
The word after the ‫ اسم اإلشارة‬has an ‫ال‬ note that the ‫ اسم إشارة‬is in ‫ رفع‬even though it
‫اسم اإلشارة‬ IN OTHER FRAGMENTS
Keep in mind that most ‫ اسم اإلشارة‬are non-flexible so they don’t show different endings for different
statuses.
If we look at our list of fragments and try to plug in ‫ اسم اإلشارة‬in the place of an ‫ اسم‬we would find it in the
following fragments:
1. After a ‫ حرف جر‬in ‫جار و َمرور‬fragment.

2. After a ‫ حرف نصب‬in a ‫ حرف نصب واسمها‬fragment.
3. Or as a ‫ مضاف إيله‬in an ‫ إضافة‬fragment.
46 | P a g e
We would not find it in a ‫ موصوف و صفة‬or as a ‫ مضاف‬because it does not make sense in the language. Take
a look at the following examples.
َ
‫جمرور‬ ‫ف هذا‬ ‫حرف ل‬
‫جر‬
In this
َ َ َّ
‫اسمه‬ ‫إن ه ىـ ُؤال ِء‬ ‫حرف نصب‬
Certainly these
َ ‫ى‬
‫مضاف إيله‬ ‫بعد ذلِك‬ ‫مضاف‬
After that
In addition to the basic examples mentioned above, we also find ‫ اسم اإلشارة‬in more complex fragments.
We find an ‫ اسم اإلشارة و مشار إيله‬fragment connected to another fragment. For example, if I wanted to say
“in this house”, in Arabic I would write ‫ابليت‬
ِ ‫ف ىهذا‬.ِ Notice that we have a ‫جار و َمرور‬fragment and a ‫اسم‬
‫اإلشارة و مشار إيله‬. Recall that the ‫ اسم اإلشارة‬and the ‫ مشار إيله‬must MATCH IN ALL FOUR PROPERTIES,
therefore they must match in status. In the above example, ‫ابليت‬ ِ ‫ ِف ىهذا‬, we see the effect of the ‫حرف جر‬
transfer through the ‫ اسم اإلشارة‬and we see the ‫ مشار إيله‬in ‫ جر‬status. Take a look at the following examples.

َ َُ
ِ‫ل ِهؤال ِء الق ْوم‬
Status: ‫جر‬ Status: ‫جر‬
For this nation
The word after the ‫ اسم اإلشارة‬has an ‫ال‬ note that the ‫ اسم إشارة‬is in ‫ جر‬even though it

Status: ‫نصب‬ َ ُ َّ Status: ‫نصب‬
Number: singular ‫إِن هذا القرآن‬ Number: singular
Certainly this Quran
The word after the ‫ اسم اإلشارة‬has an ‫ال‬ note that the ‫ اسم إشارة‬is in ‫ نصب‬even though it
47 | P a g e
Here are some more examples:
‫ِم ْن ىه ِذه القري ِة‬
From this town
ُ ‫ك‬ َ ‫َْ ُ ى‬
‫الرج ِل‬ ِ ‫بيت ذل‬
House of that man
In the above examples, an easy way to figure out the status of the ‫ مشار إيله‬is to think of the ‫ اسم اإلشارة‬as a
pipe that transfers any status changes through it directly to the ‫مشار إيله‬.
POINTING AT AN ‫إضافة‬
Recall that a ‫ مضاف‬CANNOT have an ‫ال‬. Recall also that the ‫ مشار إيله‬MUST have an ‫ال‬. So, when pointing at
an ‫ إضافة‬how are these two rules reconciled? How would you point, for instance, at the fragment ‫لل‬ ُ َْ
ِ ‫?بيت ا‬
‫لل‬ ُ َْ
ِ ‫ هذا بيت ا‬would not be a fragment because there is no ‫ ال‬on the word following the ‫اسم اإلشارة‬. On the
other hand, ‫لل‬ ُ ْ َ ‫ هذا‬would be incorrect, because ‫ بيت‬is a ‫ مضاف‬and cannot take an ‫ال‬.
ِ ‫ابليت ا‬
The solution is to place the ‫ اسم اإلشارة‬AFTER the ‫إضافة‬. The correct way to point at the fragment ‫بيت الل‬
would be ‫بيت الل هذا‬. Take a look at the following examples.
َ
‫ف اع ِم ِه ْم هذا‬
In this year of theirs
َ ْ ُ
ِ‫بِ َو ِرقِكم ه ِذه‬
With this silver coin of yours
48 | P a g e
َ ُ
‫قاء يَ ْو ِمك ْم هذا‬
َ ‫ِل‬
The meeting of this day of yours
➢ DRILL 2 Choose the appropriate pointer to create an ‫مشار إيله‬+‫ اسم إشارة‬fragment. Tell whether it
should come before (B) or after (A).
FAR AWAY FROM YOU C LOSE TO YOU B EFORE OR A FTER WORD

َ
B / A ‫الق ْو ُم‬
َ
B / A ‫ق ْو ِم‬
B / A ‫ايلَ ْو ُم‬
B / A ‫يَ ْو ِمنا‬
َُ
B / A ‫لل‬
ِ ‫ناقة ا‬
َْ ُ
B / A ‫ي‬ِ ‫الغالم‬
َ ْ ‫نسا ِء العالَم‬
‫ي‬
B / A ِ ِ
4.3 CONNECTOR LETTER S – ‫حروف العطف‬

There are a handful of ‫ ُح ُر ْوف‬in Arabic that are used to connect units of language. These connectors can
َ َ ‫ح ُر ْو ُف‬.
come between ‫أ ْس َماء‬, fragments, or sentences. They are called ‫الع ْط ِف‬ ُ When these ‫ حروف‬are used to
connect between two or more ‫اسم‬, they carry over the status of that ‫اسم‬.
َ which translates as “and”. The other ‫ حروف العطف‬will be

The most common of the ‫ حروف العطف‬is the ‫و‬,
introduced at a later time.
When labeling something that contains a ‫حرف عطف‬, the ‫ حرف‬itself is simply labeled as a ‫حرف عطف‬.
ٌ ْ
Whatever comes after the ‫ حرف‬is labeled as ______ ‫ َمع ُط ْوف َع‬. What goes in the blank is whatever comes
before the ‫حرف‬.
Take a look at the following examples.

ُ َّ ُ
‫والر ُس ْول‬ ‫الل‬
َ ُ
‫ َح ْرف ع ْطف‬:‫او‬ َ
ُ ‫الو‬
َ َ َ َ َ ٌ ْ ُ َّ
*‫ َمع ُط ْوف َع لف ِظ اجلَالل ِة‬:‫الر ُس ْول‬
َ ُ َْ
*Note: when speaking of the name of ‫ الل‬grammatically, we use the term ‫ لفظ اجلَاللة‬out of respect. This
translates as “the name Allah” or literally “the name of majesty”.
49 | P a g e
‫ي‬َ ‫الصادق‬ َّ ‫ي َوالْ َقانتَات َو‬ َ ‫ي َوال ْ ُم ْؤمنَات َوالْ َقانت‬ َ ‫ي َوال ْ ُم ْسل َمات َوال ْ ُم ْؤمن‬ َ ‫إ َّن ال ْ ُم ْسلم‬
ِِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِ ِِ ِ
َ َ َ ُْ َ َ َ َ‫اخلَاش َعات َوال ْ ُمت‬ ْ َ َ ْ َ
َ ‫اخل‬ َّ َ َّ َ َّ
‫ات‬
ِ ِ ‫ق‬ ‫د‬ ‫ص‬ ‫ت‬ ‫م‬ ‫ال‬‫و‬ ‫ي‬ ‫ق‬ ‫د‬
ِ ِ ‫ص‬ ِ ِ ‫و‬ ‫ي‬ ‫ع‬
ِ ِ ‫ات و‬
‫اش‬ ِ ‫ات َوالصابِ ِرين َوالصابِ َر‬ ِ ‫َوالصا ِدق‬
َ َّ َ َّ
...‫ات‬ِ ‫َوالصائِ ِمي َوالصائِم‬
Indeed, the Muslim men and Muslim women, the believing men and believing women, the
obedient men and obedient women, the truthful men and truthful women, the patient men and
patient women, the humble men and humble women, the charitable men and charitable women,
the fasting men and fasting women…
َّ
Notice how the effect of "‫ "إن‬is carried on to so many words by using a ‫حرف عطف‬. The "‫ "و‬is connecting a
series of ‫ أسماء‬and they all carry the same status.
ََ َ ‫َُْ َُ َ َُْ ْ ََ َْ َ َ َ َ َ َ ُ ْ ى‬
‫اطمة وموس وزك ِريا‬ ِ ‫أبو ُممد وُممود وأَحد وف‬
Father of Muhammad and Mahmood and Ahmad and Fatima and Musa and Zakariya
Notice how a series of ‫ أسماء‬are connected as multiple ‫ مضاف إيله‬to a single ‫ مضاف‬by use of connector
letter "‫"و‬. All the connected words share ‫ جر‬status because they are connected to a ‫مضاف إيله‬. Keep in
mind different ‫ أسماء‬show ‫ جر‬status in different ways.
➢ DRILL 3 Determine the status of the highlighted words.
R/N/J
ٌَ َ َ ْ ُ
‫اِل س ن و ِز ياد ة‬ R/N/J ‫ْشى‬ َ ْ ُ ‫َر َْح َ ًة َو ب‬ R/N/J
ُ‫ُم ْو َس َوأ َخاه‬
َ َ ْ َّ َ َ ُ ْ َّ ً ْ ُ
R/N/J ‫ماوات َواأل ْرض‬
ِ
َّ
‫الس‬ R/N/J ‫اَّل ي َن‬
ِ ‫هو و‬ R/N/J ‫واَّل ي َن‬
ِ ‫ه ود ا‬
َ ُ ً ُ َ َ ٌْ َ
R/N/J ‫ماوات َواأل ْر ِض‬
ِ ‫الس‬َّ R/N/J ‫ه د ى َو ن ْو ٌر‬ R/N/J ‫ي َوأ بْ ق‬ ‫خ‬
50 | P a g e
Language
Sentences
Fragments
‫حرف نصب‬ ‫موصوف‬ ‫اسم إشارة‬

‫إضافة‬ ‫جار وَمرور‬
‫واسمه‬ ‫وصفة‬ ‫ومشار إيله‬
a. ‫موصوف‬
- ‫مضاف‬: before 'of', - fragment consists - fragment consists - ‫ اسم إشارة‬followed
always light with no of ‫حرف جر‬and the of ‫ حرف نصب‬and - can never have by an ‫ اسم‬with ‫ال‬
‫ال‬ multiple ‫موصوف‬
‫ اسم‬that it beats up the ‫ اسم‬that it beats
- four properties of
- ‫مضاف إيله‬: after 'of', on up on - always comes before
the ‫صفة‬ ‫ اسم إشارة‬match with
always ‫جر‬. If it is
proper, then the the ‫مشار إيله‬
- ‫ حرف نصب‬makes - never a: pronoun,
‫ مضاف‬is proper. If it - ‫حرف جر‬makes its
pointing word or ‫اسم‬ - when pointing at
is common, the ‫ اسم‬in the ‫جر‬status its ‫ اسم‬in the ‫نصب‬ ‫موصول‬ an ‫إضافة‬, the ‫اسم‬
‫ مضاف‬is also status
common. b. ‫صفة‬ ‫ إشارة‬comes after
- Nothing comes - nothing can come - match ‫ موصوف‬in all the ‫مضاف إيله‬
between a ‫حرف جر‬ - a ‫ جار وَمرور‬or a
between a ‫مضاف‬ four properties
and its ‫مضاف إيله‬ and its ‫اسم‬ special ‫ مضاف‬of
- can have several ‫صفة‬
time and place can
Two types of ‫إضافة‬: come between to one ‫موصوف‬
a. "of" construction ‫ حرف نصب‬and its -never a: proper
b. special ‫مضاف‬ ‫اسم‬ name, pronoun,
pointing word, or ‫اسم‬
51 | P a g e
‫موصول‬
52 | P a g e
CHAPTER 5 VOCABULARY
ٌ ‫أَ ْش‬/‫ج ٌر‬

‫جار‬ َ ‫ج َر ٌة – َش‬
َ ‫َش‬ ٌ ٌ
‫َجبَل – ِجبَال‬
َْ ٌ َ
‫أِبُ ٌر‬/‫ار‬
َْ
‫ِب ٌر – ِِب‬ ‫َح ٌّق‬
tree mountain ocean truth, purpose/right
ٌّ‫دابَّ ٌة – َدواب‬ َ ٌ ‫َن َه‬ َ ٌ َ
‫ق َم ٌر‬ ‫ار‬ ‫ يلَال‬- ‫يلْل‬
creatures moon day night
ٌ ‫َن ْه ٌر – أَ ْن َه‬
‫ار‬
ٌ َََ ٌََ
‫ثمر – ثمرات‬
ٌ َّ َ ٌ َّ َ
‫جنة – جنات‬ ٌ‫َر ٌّب – أَ ْرباب‬
river yield of plant/trees garden master

ٌّ َ
)‫َش ( ِم ْن‬ ٌ ْ ‫َخ‬
)‫ي ( ِم ْن‬ ٌ‫َع ُد ٌّو – أَ ْع َداء‬ ُ َ‫َو ٌِّل – أَ ْو ِيل‬
‫اء‬ ِ
evil/worse good/better enemy protective friend
ٌ ْ َ ٌ َ َْ ٌ َ ٌ َ ُ ْ
‫ع َمل – أع َمال‬ ‫نِ َع ٌم‬/‫عمة – أن ُع ٌم‬ِ‫ن‬ ‫َحْد‬ ‫ِعل ٌم – ُعل ْو ٌم‬
deeds blessing praise and thanks knowledge
ٌ َ َ َ ٌَ َ َ ٌ َ ِّ َ ٌ َ ِّ َ ٌ ْ َ ٌ ٌ َ
‫حسنة – حسنات‬ ‫سيئة – سيئات‬ ‫فضل‬ ‫عبْد – ِعبَاد‬
good deed/thing bad deed/thing favor/grace slave/worshipper
َ ٌ َ َ ٌ ْ
‫ظال ِ ٌم‬ ‫خائِف‬ ‫ف ِر ٌح‬ ‫َم ِدينَة‬
oppressive/wrongdoing scared overjoyed city
‫ أسماء‬THAT ARE LIKE ACTIONS
‫قا ِد ٌم‬ ٌ ‫ذاه‬

‫ب‬ ِ ‫خار ٌج‬
ِ
coming going leaving/exiting
‫دار ٌس‬
ِ ‫نائِ ٌم‬ ‫راج ٌع‬
ِ
studying sleeping returning
ٌ ٌ
‫آ ِكل‬ ‫اعبِد‬ )‫ناظ ٌر(إىل‬
ِ
eating worshipping looking (at)
53 | P a g e
ُ َّ ْ ُ َ ْ ُ
CHAPTER 5 – ‫اجل م ل ة االس ِم ي ة‬
5.1 INTRODUCTION
There are two types of sentences in the Arabic language. They are ‫ اجلملة االسمية‬and ‫اجلملة الفعلية‬. If a
sentence begins with an ‫اسم‬, it is a ‫َجلة اسمية‬. There are few exceptions to this rule. If a sentence begins
with a ‫فعل‬, it is a ‫َجلة فعلية‬. There are no exceptions to this rule.
We will begin our study of sentences with ‫اجلملة االسمية‬.
5.2 FINDING THE INVI SIBLE “IS”

Every ‫ َجلة اسمية‬contains an “is” or one of its variants (am, are). In Arabic, however, there is no word for
“is” or its variants. In a ‫َجلة اسمية‬, the “is” is invisible. There is one golden rule that you can use when
searching for the invisible “is” in a ‫َجلة اسمية‬. It is called “the break in the chain” rule.
A BREAK IN THE CHAIN

We were introduced to the concept of words having a relationship with the words around them when
we studied the five fragments in the previous chapter. As long as a word is a part of one of these five
fragments, it is in a relationship and is a part of what we call “the chain,” a chain of words that are all
connected in some way.
As soon as we find two words that are not a part of one of the following relationships, we have a break in
the chain:
ْ َ ُ
2) ‫واس ُمها‬ ْ ‫َح ْر ُف نَّ ْصب‬
َُ
3) ‫اإلضافة‬ ِ
ُ َ ِّ ُ
4) ‫الم ْو ُص ْوف والصفة‬َ
َ َ ُ ُ ْ
َ ‫اس ُم اإل‬
5) ‫شار إِيلْه‬ ‫شار ِة والم‬ِ
َ ُ
6) ‫َح ْرف ع ْطف‬
If you find multiple breaks, the “is” goes after the first break.
54 | P a g e
ْ َُ َ َ َ ُ َ
‫ابلنُ ْون | ِزيْنة اِل َيا ِة اَلنيا‬‫المال و‬
Wealth and children are an adornment of the lowest life.

‫ املال‬is connected to ‫ ابلنون‬through a ‫حرف عطف‬
There is no connection between ‫ ابلنون‬and ‫زينة‬, so there is a break in the chain.
‫ زينة‬is connected to ‫ اِلياة‬through an ‫إضافة‬. ‫ اَلينا‬is connected to ‫ اِلَيا ِة‬as its ‫صفة‬.
ْ ُ َّ َ ُ ََْ
‫لل والرسو ِل‬ِ ِ | ‫األنفال‬
The spoils of war are for Allah and the messenger.

There is no connection between ‫ األنفال‬and ‫لل‬, so there is a break in the chain.
‫ الرسول‬is connected to ‫ لل‬through a ‫حرف عطف‬
ْ ُ ْ
‫َبع ُضك ْم | ِم ْن َبعض‬
Some of you are from some (others).

‫ بعض‬is connected to ‫ كم‬through an ‫إضافة‬.
There is no connection between ‫ بعضكم‬and the ‫ جار وَمرور‬so there is a break in the chain.
COMMON BREAKS IN THE CHAIN

There are some breaks in the chain that occur frequently. Take a look at the list below.
#1: AFTER INDEPENDENT PRONOUNS
Independent pronouns are followed by an invisible “is”. They usually appear at the very beginning of the
sentence. If the independent pronoun is followed by an ‫اسم‬, the pronoun and the ‫ اسم‬match in number
and gender.
َ ُْ ْ ُ ٌ َْ ْ َُْ
After-is ‫رسفون‬
ِ ‫أنتم | قوم م‬ Before-is
You all are an extravagant nation.
55 | P a g e
ُ
‫الل‬ َُ
After-is
Number: singular | ‫هو‬ Before-is
Number: singular
He is Allah.
ُْ ٌْ َ َ
After-is
‫أنا | خي ِمنه‬ Before-is
Gender: masculine/feminine Gender: masculine/feminine
I am better than him.
ْ ُ
After-is ‫تاب‬
ِ ‫ك‬ ِ ‫ه َو | ِمن ال‬ Before-is
Can come as a ‫ ;جار وجمرور‬has Number: singular
no number or gender. Gender: masculine
It is from the book.
#2: AFTER POINTERS – ‫أسماء اإلشارة‬
There is an invisible “is” after an ‫ اسم اإلشارة‬if the word after it does not have an ‫ال‬. It usually appears at
the very beginning of the sentence. If the ‫ اسم اإلشارة‬is followed by an ‫اسم‬, it matches with the ‫ اسم‬in
number and gender.
‫ار‬ ُ ‫ك أَ ْص‬
َّ ‫حاب‬
‫انل‬
َ ُْ
After-is
Number: plural ِ | ِ‫أوالئ‬ Before-is
Number: plural
the word that comes after the ‫اسم اإلشارة‬

does not have ‫ال‬
Those are the people of the fire
ْ ْ
After-is
Can come as a ‫ ; جار وجمر‬has no
‫لل‬
ِ ‫هذا | ِمن ِعن ِد ا‬ Before-is
Number: singular
number or gender. Gender: masculine
This is from Allah
56 | P a g e
ُ َ ُ َ
After-is ‫ه ُؤال ِء | شفعائنا‬ Before-is
Number: plural
Number: plural
Gender: masculine
Gender: masculine
does not have ‫ال‬ These are our intercessors
َُ
After-is
Number: singular
‫لل‬
ِ ‫هذه | ناقة ا‬ Before-is
Gender: feminine Number: singular
Gender: feminine
does not have ‫ال‬
This is Allah’s she-camel
SENTENCE VS. FRAGMENT

Let us revisit the second rule of ‫اسم اإلشارة واملشار إيله‬. The ‫ مشار إيله‬must have an ‫ال‬. This is because if it does
not, the fragment turns into a sentence. For example, ‫ هذه اآلية‬translates as “this ayah”. Remove the ‫ال‬,
and it becomes ‫هذه آية‬, which translates as “This is an ayah”.
***REMEMBER , if there is an ‫ال‬, it is a fragment. If there is no ‫ال‬, it is a sentence.
Also know that ‫ اسم اإلشارة واملشار إيله‬is not the only relationship that an ‫ اسم إشارة‬can be in. An ‫ اسم إشارة‬can
appear as ‫ اسم إن‬or as a ‫ َمرور‬or as a ‫ مضاف إيله‬to name a few.
➢ DRILL 1 Sentence or Fragment?
‫ار‬ َّ ُُْ َ َ ْ ُ ُ َ
‫ت ِلك الق َرى‬ ُ‫هذ ه األَ ن ْهار‬
S / F ِ ‫أ و الئ ِك و ق ود انل‬ S / F S / F ِ ِ
َ َ ْ َ َْ ْ َ َ ‫هذا‬
S / F ‫ه ؤال ِء ق ْو ٌم‬ S / F ‫ب‬
ِ ‫ذلك ِم ن أ ن با ِء الغ ي‬ S / F
ٌ ‫ح‬
‫رام‬
#3: AFTER HoN - ‫حرف انلصب واسمها‬
A ‫ حرف انلصب‬along with its ‫ اسم‬is followed by an “is”. It generally appears at the beginning of a sentence.
َّ
The ‫ اسم‬of ‫ إِن‬matches in number and gender with the word after “is”.
57 | P a g e
ُ ‫إنَّها َب َق َر ٌة َص ْف‬
‫راء‬ | ِ
Certainly it is a yellow cow.
‫الصابِ ِريْ َن‬ َ َّ

َّ ‫الل َم َع‬
| ‫ِإن‬
Certainly Allah is with those who are patient.
Remember that the “is” comes AFTER the ‫ اسم‬of the ‫حرف نصب‬. It does not come between the ‫حرف انلصب‬
and its ‫اسم‬.
#4: BETWEEN A PROPER AND A COMMON WORD
When a proper word is followed directly by a common word, an “is” goes between them. The two words
usually match in number and gender.
‫ان‬َ َْ ُ َْ ُ َ
After-is
Number: pair ِ ‫يداه| مبسوطت‬ Before-is
Number: pair
Type: common Type: proper
the “before-is” and “after-is” match in
number and gender
His (2) hands are extended.
ْ
‫واس ٌع َع ِلي ٌم‬ ُ
ِ | ‫والل‬
And Allah is all-encompassing and all-knowing
Note that this is a list of common breaks in the chain for your reference. Not all breaks fit into one of
these four categories.
58 | P a g e
➢ DRILL 2 Draw a line at the break in the chain. Translate the ayaat using the word bank.
ٌ َ
‫ بَالغ‬- announcement ‫ – َم ْط ِو ٌّي‬folded ‫ناظ ٌر‬
ِ – one who looks
ٌ ِّ‫ – َمي‬dead
‫ت‬ ‫ – َغر‬cave
ٌ َ ُ ََ ٌ ُ
‫ناس‬
ِ ‫ هذا بالغ لِل‬.1 ‫ أنا يُ ْو ُسف‬.2 ‫السماوات َم ْط ِو َّيات‬
َّ ‫ َو‬.3
َّ ُ َ ْ َ َ َ َّ ٌ ِّ َ َ َّ َ ْ َ ُ
‫اظ ِريْ َن‬
ِ ‫اء لِلن‬‫ ِه بيض‬.4 ‫ت َو ِإن ُه ْم َميِّتُ ْون‬‫ ِإنك مي‬.5 ‫ار‬
ِ ‫ هما ِف الغ‬.6
5.3 ‫ – إعراب اجلملة االسمية‬GRAMMATICAL LABELING

When it comes to grammatical labeling or ‫إعراب‬, we use a two-level labeling system. The two levels are:
1) Sentence-level labels – also known as macro-‫إعراب‬

2) Fragment-level labels – also known as micro-‫إعراب‬
Think of sentence-level labels as buckets that contain words or fragments inside of them. Sentence-level
labels are the higher-level labels that deal with the parts of a sentence on a larger scale. Fragment-level
labels are used to further dissect the sentence-level material.
Rather than thinking of these two types of labels as separate systems, think of them as two levels of the
same system. The inner-workings of this system will become clearer as we move through the chapter.
S E N T E N C E -L E V E L L A B E L S
A ‫ َجلة اسمية‬is made up of three parts. They are:
َ ُْ
1) ‫المبتَدأ‬ – The ‫ مبتدأ‬is the part BEFORE “is”. It is made up of a single ‫ اسم‬or an ‫اسم‬+‫ اسم‬fragment or a
HoN and its ‫اسم‬. It is ‫ مرفوع‬by default. The four common breaks in the chain that we learned
are considered common types of ‫مبتدأ‬.
2) ‫ – اخل َ َْب‬The ‫ خْب‬is the part AFTER “is”. It is made up of a single ‫ اسم‬or an ‫اسم‬+‫ اسم‬fragment. It is
‫ مرفوع‬by default.
ِّ ُ
3) ‫المتَ َعلق باخل َ َْب‬ – The ‫ متعلق باخلْب‬is the part AFTER “is”. It is made up of a ‫ جار وَمرور‬or a special ‫مضاف‬
fragment of time and place.
59 | P a g e
Every ‫ َجلة اسمية‬must have a part BEFORE “is” and a part AFTER “is”. This means that it must have a ‫مبتدأ‬
and either a ‫ خْب‬or a ‫متعلق باخلْب‬. It may have both a ‫ خْب‬and a ‫متعلق باخلْب‬. In this case, the “is” goes at the
first break in the chain. Again, you CANNOT have a ‫ َجلة اسمية‬without a ‫مبتدأ‬.
Take a look at the following examples. The ‫ مبتدأ‬is underlined once, the ‫ خْب‬twice, and the ‫ متعلق باخلْب‬three
times.
َ َ َ َ َّ
‫ِإن َصالتك َسك ٌن ل ُه ْم‬
Certainly your prayer is relief for them.
َ ْ ‫ي اِلاكم‬
‫ي‬ ُ ْ ‫َو ُه َو َخ‬
ِِ
And He is the best of judges.
Notice that there is no ‫متعلق باخلْب‬, only a ‫خْب‬.
ْ ُ َ ْ َ َ َّ
‫ِإن أبانا ل ِِف ضالل م ِبي‬
Certainly our father is in clear error
Notice that there is no ‫خْب‬, only a ‫متعلق باخلْب‬.
The ‫ الم‬on the ‫ ف‬is what is called ‫الم اتلوكي ِد‬, or the ‫ الم‬of emphasis.
F R A G M E N T -L E V E L L A B E L S
Recall that on a sentence-level, we have the ‫مبتدأ‬, the ‫خْب‬, and the ‫متعلق باخلْب‬. Each of these is like a
bucket that holds either an ‫ اسم‬or a fragment inside of it. When doing fragment-level labeling, we are
pulling the contents out of the sentence-level buckets and analyzing them.
60 | P a g e
‫اجلملة االسمية‬
‫متعلق‬
‫خب‬ ‫مبتدأ‬
‫باخلب‬
- ‫جار وَمرور‬ -single ‫اسم‬
-single ‫اسم‬
- special ‫مضاف‬ - ‫ اسم‬+ ‫ اسم‬fragment
- ‫ اسم‬+ ‫ اسم‬fragment
fragment
-HoN & its ‫اسم‬
Let us take a look at a few examples.

َ َ َ َ َّ
‫ِإن َصالتك َسك ٌن ل ُه ْم‬
Certainly your prayer is relief for them.
In the ayah above, on a sentence-level, we have a ‫ مبتدأ‬bucket, a ‫ خْب‬bucket, and a ‫ متعلق باخلْب‬bucket. Let
us look at what we have contained within each.
1) Within the ‫مبتدأ‬, we have two fragments:

َ َ َّ
a. ‫ص الة‬ ‫ إ ِن‬is a ‫حرف انلصب واسمها‬
َ َ َ
b. ‫ ص الت ك‬is an ‫إضافة‬
2) There are no fragments within the ‫خْب‬
3) Within the ‫متعلق باخلْب‬, there is one fragment:
َ
a. ‫ ل ُه ْم‬is a ‫جار وَمرور‬
ْ ُ َ ْ َ َ َّ
‫ِإن أبانا ل ِِف ضالل م ِبي‬
Certainly our father is in clear error
In the ayah above, on a sentence-level, we have a ‫ مبتدأ‬bucket and a ‫ متعلق باخلْب‬bucket. Let us look at
what we have contained within each.
1) Within the ‫ مبتدأ‬we have two fragments:

َ َّ
a. ‫ إ ِن أ با‬is a ‫حرف انلصب واسمه‬
َ
b. ‫ أ بانا‬is an ‫إضافة‬
61 | P a g e
2) Within the ‫ متعلق باخلْب‬we have two fragments:
َ َ
a. ‫ ل ِِف ض الل‬is a ‫جار وَمرور‬
ْ َ
b. ‫ ض الل ُم بِ ي‬is a ‫موصوف وصفة‬
➢ DRILL 3 Underline the ‫ مبتدأ‬once, the ‫ خْب‬twice, and the ‫ متعلق باخلْب‬three times.
ٌ َ ُ ِّ َ ُ َ َ ُ َّ
‫ناس‬
ِ ‫ هذا بالغ لِل‬.1 ‫ ِإِن َم َعك ْم‬.2 ‫ ِإنه لق ْول َر ُس ْول ك ِريْم‬.3
َّ ُ َ ْ َ َ َ َّ ٌ ِّ َ َ َّ َ ْ َ ُ
‫اظ ِريْ َن‬
ِ ‫اء لِلن‬‫ ِه بيض‬.4 ‫ت َو ِإن ُه ْم َميِّتُ ْون‬‫ ِإنك مي‬.5 ‫ار‬
ِ ‫ هما ِف الغ‬.6
5.4 ABNORMAL SENTENC E STRUCTURE

The standard order for a typical ‫ َجلة اسمية‬is the ‫ مبتدأ‬followed by the ‫ خْب‬followed by the ‫متعلق باخلْب‬.
It is possible for this order to be shifted for rhetorical purposes. Shifting the order can produce several
different meanings. The meaning produced by the shift in order is determined by the type of shift and
the context.
َّ َ ُ
In terms of labeling, when something appears before it is expected to, it is labeled as ‫مقدم‬, which means
َّ
“brought forward”. When something appears after it is expected to, it is labeled as ‫ ُم َؤخر‬which means
“delayed”. If there is something that is ‫ مقدم‬in a sentence, there will necessarily be something ‫مؤخر‬.
There are two common abnormal patterns. They are:
x ‫املبتدأ‬ ‫املتعلق باخلْب‬ )1

‫اخلْب‬ ‫املتعلق باخلْب‬ ‫املبتدأ‬ )2
The first pattern (in which the ‫ متعلق باخلْب‬comes before the ‫ )مبتدأ‬generally produces a meaning of
ْ
exclusivity or ‫ ِاخ ِتصاص‬. Take a look at the following examples.
‫مؤخر‬ ‫مقدم‬
َ
ُ ‫المص‬
‫ي‬ ِ ‫َوإِىل ا‬
ِ ِ ‫لل‬
And to Allah alone is the final place of return
َْ ُ َ َُْ َ
‫ب‬
ِ ‫و ِعنده مفاتِح الغي‬
And with Him exclusively are the keys to the unseen
62 | P a g e
ْ َ َّ ‫ك‬ُ ْ ُ َُ
‫ماوات َواألر ِض‬
ِ ‫الس‬ ‫َل مل‬
For Him alone is the ownership of the skies and the earth
Know that if the ‫ مبتدأ‬is common, it MUST be made ‫مؤخر‬. When the ‫ مبتدأ‬is common, there is no ‫بالغة‬
implication in the ‫ متعلق باخلْب‬being brought forward. This is because it is the only way to structure the
sentence.
ٌ ُُ
‫ِف قل ْوبِ ِه ْم َم َرض‬
There is a sickness in their hearts
(lit. In their hearts is a sickness)
ً َ َ ً ْ َ ْ ُ َ َّ
‫أن لهم أجرا حسنا‬
That they have a beautiful compensation
In the example shown above, the ‫( حرف نصب واسمها‬the ‫ )مبتدأ‬is considered ‫مؤخر‬. Since this fragment can be in a long-distance
relationship, if one portion is ‫مؤخر‬, the entire fragment is ‫مؤخر‬.
The second pattern (in which the ‫ مبتدأ‬remains in its place and the ‫ خْب‬and ‫ متعلق باخلْب‬switch places) can
produce a variety of meanings. The intended meaning is determined by context. Emphasis (‫)اتل ْو ِكيْد‬
َّ and
ْ
giving importance or showing interest (‫ )االه ِت َمام‬are two of the many possibilities.

َ ْ َ ِّ ُ َ ُ َ
‫َشء ق ِدي ْ ٌر‬ ‫والل َع ك‬
And Allah is completely capable over every single thing.
Note that there is a difference between “abnormal” and “unusual” or “rare”. The structures introduced
in this section defy the standard, but are commonly used and commonly found in the Quran and other
literature.
63 | P a g e
➢ DRILL 4 Underline the ‫ مبتدأ‬once, the ‫ خْب‬twice, and the ‫ متعلق باخلْب‬three times. If a
component is ‫ مقدم‬or ‫مؤخر‬, mention that it is.
ُ ُ َ ْ َْ َ ْ ْ َُ ٌ َ ٌ
‫السما ِء ِر ْزقك ْم‬
َّ ‫ِف‬
ْ ‫ َو‬.1
ِ ‫ف غفلة ُمع ِر ُض ْون‬ِ ‫ وهم‬.2 ‫ ِفيْ ِه آيات بَيِّنات‬.3
ٌ ُ َ ُ َ َّ َ ْ َ ُْ ََ َ ٌ ‫ َف ُه ْم ِفيْ ِه َس‬.6
‫الل بِك ْم ل َرؤ ْوف َر ِحيْ ٌم‬ ‫ و ِإن‬.4 ‫الوار ِث ِمثل ذلِك‬
ِ ‫ وَع‬.5 ‫واء‬
5.5 “HE HAS” AND “TH ERE IS” SENTENCES

There are two structures in Arabic where abnormal sentence structure is used. These structures are
used in ordinary speech and not for rhetorical purposes. They are:
1) “he has” sentences, which express possession

2) “there is” sentences, which express the existence of something or someone
The ‫ متعلق باخلْب مقدم‬followed by a ‫ مبتدأ مؤخر‬structure is used. MEMORIZE the templates for each type of
sentence.
POSSESSIVE SENTENCES
There are two templates that are commonly used to express possession. As stated previously, both of
these templates are made up of a ‫ متعلق باخلْب مقدم‬followed by a ‫مبتدأ مؤخر‬.
In the first template, the ‫ متعلق باخلْب مقدم‬is made up of a ‫ )حرف اجلر( الم‬followed by THE OWNER OF THE ITEM .
The ‫ مبتدأ مؤخر‬is THE ITEM THAT IS OWNED.
ٌ ْ َ
‫مبتدأ مؤخر‬ ‫َشب‬ِ ‫َلا‬ ‫متعلق باخلب مقدم‬
She has a right to drink.
(lit. For her is a right to drink.)
ْ َ َ ْ ُ ِّ َ ُ ْ َ َّ ْ
‫ي‬
ِ ‫لِْلك ِر ِمثل حظ األنثي‬
The male has the equivalent of the share of two females.
(lit. For the male is the equivalent of the share of two females.)
This template is the default for expressing possession.
64 | P a g e
➢ DRILL 5 Translate the following ayaat. Use the word bank provided below.
ْ َ َ ْ َ ُ
‫ – أعمال‬deeds ‫ – َعذاب‬punishment ‫ – أ ِيلْم‬painful ‫ – أجر‬reward ‫ – ن ْور‬light
ُ ُ ْ َ ُ َ ُ ْ َ َ َ ٌ َ َْ ْ ُ ُ ُ ْ َ َ
‫ نلا أعمانلا َولك ْم أعمالك ْم‬.3 ‫ذاب أ ِيلْ ٌم‬‫ َولِلَك ِف ِرين ع‬.2 ‫ ل ُه ْم أج ُره ْم َون ْو ُره ْم‬.1
In the second template, the ‫ متعلق باخلْب مقدم‬is made up of a ‫( عند‬special ‫ )مضاف‬followed by THE OWNER OF
THE ITEM .
The ‫ مبتدأ مؤخر‬is THE ITEM THAT IS OWNED.

ُ َُْ َ
‫تاب‬
ِ ‫ك‬ ِ ‫و ِعنده أم ال‬
And with only Him is the essence of the book.
َْ ُ َ َُْ َ
‫ب‬
ِ ‫و ِعنده مفاتِح الغي‬
And with him exclusively are the keys to the unseen.
This template is used to express closeness but does not imply permanent possession.
“T H E R E I S ” S E N T E N C E S
There are two templates that are commonly used to express the existence of something at a certain
location.
This first is made up of a ‫ متعلق باخلْب مقدم‬followed by a ‫مبتدأ مؤخر‬.
ٌ ُُ ْ
‫ف قل ْوبِ ِه ْم َم َرض‬ ِ
There is a disease in their hearts.
(lit. In their hearts is a disease.)
65 | P a g e
ٌ َْ
‫َو َبين ُهما ِحجاب‬
And there is a barrier between the two of them.
(lit. And between the two of them is a barrier.)
*See APPENDIX II for “There Is” sentence structure in Modern Standard Arabic.
➢ DRILL 6 Translate the following ayaat. Use the word bank provided below.
َْ َ
‫فاسق‬
ِ – trespasser ‫ – أكْث‬most ‫ – بَ ِّي‬clear ‫ – ِر ْزق‬provisions
َ ُ ْ ‫ْث ُه‬َ ْ ََ َ ُْ ْ ُ ْ ُْ ٌ َ ٌ ُ ُ
‫الفاسق ْون‬
ِ ‫م‬ ُ ‫ ِمنهم المؤ ِمنون وأك‬.3 ‫ ِفيْ ِه آيات بَيِّنات‬.2 ‫السما ِء ِر ْزقك ْم‬
َّ ‫ِف‬
ْ ‫ َو‬.1
ِ
5.6 COMPLEX SENTENCE S

HAVING A SENTENCE AS A ‫خب‬
Recall our discussion about sentence-level and fragment-level labels or macro and micro ‫إعراب‬. Recall
that on a sentence level, the possibilities are limited. In a ‫ َجلة اسمية‬on a sentence level, there are only
three labels or “buckets”: ‫املتعلق باخلْب‬،‫ اخلْب‬،‫املبتدأ‬. The contents of those buckets, however, can vary. The
topic of complex sentence is concerned with the ‫ خْب‬bucket in particular, and what it can hold within it.
The ‫ خْب‬bucket is special and different than the other two buckets in that it can hold a FULL SENTENCE
within it. It can carry both ‫ َجلة اسمية‬and ‫َجلة فعلية‬. We will study more about ‫ َجلة فعلية‬as a ‫ خْب‬after we
study ‫فعل‬.
For now, take a look at the following examples of a ‫ َجلة اسمية‬as a ‫خْب‬.
ُ
‫خب‬ ‫هذا ه َو اِلَق‬ ‫مبتدأ‬
This, it is the truth.
ْ ُ ُ ُ َّ َ َ ْ َ َ َّ
‫خب‬ ‫إِنك أنت عالم الغيو ِب‬ ‫مبتدأ‬
Certainly you, you are the knower of the unseen.
66 | P a g e
In the examples above, there are two tiers of sentence-level labeling. This is because the ‫خْب‬, which is a
sentence-level label, has a sentence inside of it. After completing the first tier of sentence-level labeling,
the sentence inside the ‫ خْب‬is pulled out and labeled like any other sentence.
ُ
‫ه َو اِلَق‬
It is the truth.
ُ َّ َ ْ َ
‫ت َعال ُم الغيُ ْو ِب‬ ‫أن‬
You are the knower of the unseen.
➢ DRILL 7 Underline the ‫ مبتدأ‬once, the ‫ خْب‬twice, and the ‫ متعلق باخلْب‬three times. Rewrite the
contents of the ‫ خْب‬in the box provided and repeat the underlining process.
َ َُ
َّ ‫ك ُه ْم َوقُ ْو ُد‬ َ َ َ َّ ُ ‫الس َف َه‬
ُ ‫ إ َّن ُه ْم ُه ْم‬.1
‫ار‬
ِ ‫انل‬ ِ‫ وأالئ‬.3 ‫ إِن هذا ل ُه َو الق َص ُص اِلَق‬.2 ‫اء‬ ِ
H A V I N G M U L T I P L E ‫خب‬
Know that it is possible to have two or more ‫ خْب‬back-to-back with no ‫ حرف العطف‬between them. This
occurs most commonly with the names of Allah, but also elsewhere in the Quran and other literature.
ْ
‫واس ٌع َع ِلي ٌم‬ ُ
ِ | ‫والل‬
And Allah is all-encompassing and all-knowing.
ُ ُ ‫الر َْح ُن‬

‫الم ْستَعان‬ َّ ‫َو َربنا‬
|
And our master is the merciful and the one who is relied upon.
67 | P a g e
APPENDIX I
THE REFEREE PRONOUN
We learned that when there is no ‫ ال‬on the word following a ‫اسمُإشارة‬, a sentence is formed. For example,
ٌُ‫ هذاُبَيْت‬translates as “This is a house”. However, if you wanted to say “This is the house,” the word
“house” would require an ‫ال‬. Adding an ‫ ال‬would turn the sentence into a fragment. What is the
solution?
The solution is to add the ‫ ال‬and then to add what is called a referee pronoun between the ‫ اسمُاإلشارة‬and
the word following. This pronoun should match with the ‫ اسمُاإلشارة‬in number and gender. The correct
way to say “This is the house” is:
The Referee Pronoun

Number: singular
ُ‫هَذاُه َُوُالبَيْت‬ ‫اسم اإلشا رة‬
Number: singular
This is the house
The word after it has an ‫ال‬
Take a look at the following examples in which the referee pronoun is used.
The Referee Pronoun

Number: singular
ُ‫َذ ِل َكُه َُوُالفَ ْوزُال َع ِظيْم‬ ‫اسم اإلشارة‬
Gender: masculine Number: singular
That is the great success Gender: masculine
The Referee Pronoun

Number: plural
ُ َُ‫فَأ ْوالئِ َكُهمُُالفا ِسق ْون‬ ‫اسم اإلشارة‬
Number: plura
Then those are the ones who cause corruption
➢ DRILL 8 Turn the following fragments into sentences without removing the ‫ال‬.
َ ْ َ
‫أ ْوالئِك المفل ِح ْون‬ .1
َ
َّ ‫ِلك‬
‫الار اآلخ َِرة‬ ‫ت‬ .2
‫هذا ابلَالء‬ .3
‫هذه ايلَد‬ .4
ْ
‫هؤالءِ المؤمِنات‬ .5
68 | P a g e
APPENDIX II
In Modern Standard Arabic, there is another template to create the “There Is” sentence structure. It is
َ ‫”ه‬ُ
made up of the word “‫ناك‬ followed by a ‫ مبتدأ مؤخر‬followed by a ‫متعلق باخلْب‬. This template is unique to
modern Arabic and does not occur in the Quran. Below shows how the previous “there is” sentences
would be expressed in modern Arabic:
ُُ ٌ َ ‫ُه‬
‫ناك َم َرض ِف قل ْوبِ ِه ْم‬
There is a disease in their hearts.
َْ ٌ َ ‫ُه‬
‫ناك ِحجاب بَين ُهما‬
And there is a barrier between the two of them.
In this template, the ‫ مبتدأ‬must be common.
69 | P a g e
‫‪CHAPTER 6 VOCABULARY‬‬
‫‪COMMONL Y USED‬‬ ‫مفعول فيه‬

‫َْ‬
‫أم ِس‪/‬‬ ‫َ ْ ُ َ ُْ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫َ ٌَ‬
‫‪yesterday‬‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫حيث‪/‬حيثما ‪where/wherever‬‬ ‫سنة – ِسنِي ‪year‬‬
‫بِاألم ِس‬
‫َ ً َ‬ ‫ََْ‬ ‫َْ ُ ُ ٌُْ‬ ‫َ ْ‬
‫غدا‪/‬الغد ‪tomorrow‬‬ ‫يوم ِئذ ‪on that day‬‬ ‫شه ٌر – أشه ٌر‪/‬شهور ‪month‬‬
‫ٌَ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ ْ ٌ َ َّ ٌ‬
‫ساعة ‪hour‬‬ ‫اآلن ‪now‬‬ ‫يوم – أيام ‪day‬‬
‫َْ َْ‬ ‫ُ َّ َ‬ ‫َ َْ‬
‫ِحي‪ِ /‬حينما ‪when‬‬ ‫َكما ‪whenever‬‬ ‫ايلَوم ‪today‬‬
‫ََ ً‬
‫أبدا ‪forever/never‬‬
‫ََش ٌء – أَ ْش ُ‬
‫ياء‬
‫ٌ َْ ٌ‬
‫مال – أموال‬
‫َ ٌّ َ ْ َ ُ َ َ‬
‫اء‪/‬ن ِبي ْون‬‫ن ِِب – أن ِبي‬
‫ٌ‬ ‫ٌ‬
‫َر ُس ْول – ُر ُسل‬
‫‪thing‬‬ ‫‪wealth‬‬ ‫‪prophet‬‬ ‫‪messenger‬‬
‫ِس – أَ ْ َ‬
‫ِسارٌ‬ ‫ٌّ‬ ‫ب – أَ ْص َ‬
‫حابٌ‬ ‫َصاح ٌ‬
‫ِ‬
‫َ ْ ٌ َ َ ْ ُ‬
‫ح ِديث – أحا ِديث‬
‫ْ ٌ‬
‫ِحك َمة‬
‫ِ‬
‫‪secrets‬‬ ‫‪companion/dweller‬‬ ‫‪discourse/speech‬‬ ‫‪wisdom‬‬
‫‪3-LETTER‬‬
‫ُ ُ ً‬ ‫ْ ُ ُ‬ ‫َ َ َ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫َُ‬ ‫ََ‬
‫‪to enter‬‬ ‫دخل يَدخل دخ ْوال‬ ‫‪to ask‬‬ ‫ُسؤاال‬ ‫َسأل ي َ ْسأل‬
‫ً‬ ‫كتُ ُ‬‫ََ َ َ ْ‬ ‫ًَ‬ ‫َََ ََُْ‬
‫‪to write‬‬ ‫ب ِكتابَة‬ ‫ك تب ي‬ ‫‪to read‬‬ ‫ِقراءة‬ ‫قرأ يقرأ‬
‫َ َ َ َْ ُ ُ َ ْ ً‬
‫‪to eat‬‬ ‫أكل يأكل أكال‬ ‫‪to hear‬‬ ‫َس ِم َع ي َ ْس َم ُع َس ْم ًعا‬
‫ُ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ََ‬ ‫َُْ‬ ‫ََ‬
‫‪to leave/emerge‬‬ ‫خ َر َج َي ُر ُج خ ُر ْو ًجا‬ ‫‪to look‬‬ ‫نظ َر ينظ ُر نظ ًرا (إىل)‬
‫َ ً‬
‫راسة‬
‫ْ‬
‫د َر َس يَد ُر ُس ِد‬
‫َ‬
‫ب ذهابًا‬
‫َ‬ ‫ب ي َ ْذ َه ُ‬ ‫َذ َه َ‬
‫‪to study‬‬ ‫‪to go‬‬
‫َ َُ ُ َ ً‬ ‫ًْ‬ ‫ََْ ُ‬ ‫َ‬
‫‪to say‬‬ ‫قال يق ْول ق ْوال‬ ‫‪to memorize/protect‬‬ ‫َح ِفظ َيفظ ِحفظا‬
‫ْ‬ ‫ْ ُ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ََْ‬
‫‪to mention/remember‬‬ ‫ذك َر يَذك ُر ِذك ًرا‬ ‫‪to know‬‬ ‫َع ِل َم يعل ُم ِعل ًما‬
‫َ َ َُْ َ ًْ‬
‫‪to return‬‬ ‫َر َج َع يَ ْر ِج ُع ُر ُج ْو ًاع‬ ‫‪to create‬‬ ‫خل َق َيل ُق خلقا‬
‫‪FAMILY II‬‬
‫)‪to remind (s.o of s.t‬‬ ‫َذ َّك َر يُ َذ ِّك ُر ت َ ْذ ِك ْ ً‬

‫يا (ـه‪ ،‬بـ)‬ ‫‪to teach‬‬
‫َّ ُ ِّ َ ْ‬
‫َعل َم ي َعل ُم تع ِليْ ًما‬
‫‪FAMILY IV‬‬
‫ً‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫َ َ‬ ‫أَن ْ َذ َر ُينْذ ُر إن ْ َذ ً‬
‫)‪to send (s.o w/ s.t‬‬ ‫أ ْر َسل يُ ْر ِسل ِإ ْر َساال (ـه‪ ،‬بـ)‬ ‫)‪to warn (s.o of s.t‬‬ ‫ارا (ـه‪ ،‬بـ)‬ ‫ِ ِ‬
‫‪FAMILY V‬‬
‫َ َ َّ َ َ َّ َ َ‬ ‫َ َّ َ َّ َ‬
‫‪to remember/ponder‬‬ ‫تذك َر يتَذك ُر تذك ًرا‬ ‫‪to learn‬‬ ‫ت َعل َم يتَ َعل ُم ت َعل ًما‬
‫‪FAMILY VIII‬‬
‫ا ْستَ َم َع ي َ ْستَم ُع ا ْست َم ً‬ ‫ا ْجت َم ً‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫ْ‬
‫‪to listen carefully‬‬ ‫ااع (لـ‪/‬إىل)‬ ‫ِ ِ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪to meet/gather‬‬ ‫ااع‬ ‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ْيتَ ِم ُع‬ ‫ِاجتَ َم َع‬
‫‪70 | P a g e‬‬
َ ‫الفِ ْع ل‬
ْ ِ ‫الم‬
CHAPTER 6 – ‫اض‬
6.1 INTRODUCTION
A ‫ فعل‬in Arabic differs from an English verb in that every ‫ فعل‬contains a pronoun inside of it. This pronoun
serves as a doer. Together, an action and a doer make a full sentence. Because a ‫ فعل‬contains both, it is
considered a full sentence, a ‫َجلة فعلية‬.
There are three types of ‫ فعل‬in Arabic. They are:
1) ‫ – الفعل الماضىي‬the past-tense ‫فعل‬

2) ‫ – الفعل المضارع‬the present/future-tense ‫فعل‬
3) ‫انلهىي‬/‫ – فعل األمر‬the imperative ‫فعل‬
There are other ‫ فعل‬forms that can be derived from these three types, but they are not considered
separate types or categories of ‫فعل‬. They are considered variations of these three basic types.
USING A ‫ فعل‬I N A SENTENCE

Recall that if a sentence begins with a ‫فعل‬, it is a ‫جملةُفعلية‬. Recall that a ‫ فعل‬is an action that has a tense,
so a ‫ جملةُفعلية‬is a sentence that contains some sort of action.
Just as a ‫ جملةُاسمية‬has three parts, there are also three parts to a ‫جملةُفعلية‬. They are:
1) ‫ – الفعل‬the action
2) ‫ – الفاعل‬the doer; the one who carries out the action
3) ‫ – المفعول‬the detail
Let us explore each of these three components in detail, one at a time.
  
71 | P a g e
6.2 ‫الفعل الماضىي‬
Because every ‫ فعل‬has a pronoun inside of it, the ‫ فعل‬takes on a different form depending on what
pronoun it contains. Observe how the ending of eachُ‫ فعل‬changes depending on the pronoun. MEMORIZE
all of the ‫ أفعال‬in the chart below along with their corresponding pronouns.

ُ َ َ‫ُه ْم ن‬
‫َص ْوا‬
َ ُ
‫هما ن ََصا‬ َ َ َ‫ُه َو ن‬
‫َص‬
masculine
third person
They helped. Both of them helped. He helped.

َ َ ُ َ َ َ‫ُهما ن‬ ْ َ َ َ َ
‫ه َّن ن َصـــ ْرن‬ ‫َصتا‬ ‫َصت‬ ‫ِه ن‬
feminine
They helped. Both of them helped. She helped.
ْ َ َ‫أَ ْنتُ ْم ن‬
ْ‫َص ُتم‬ ُْ َ َ َُْ
‫أنتما نَصتما‬
َ ْ َ َ َ َْ
‫أنت نَصت‬
masculine
second person
َّ ُ ْ‫أَن‬ ُْ َ َ َُْ َ َْ
All of you helped. You two helped. You helped.
َّ‫َص ُتن‬
ْ َ َ‫ت ن‬ ‫أنتما نَصتما‬ ْ َ
‫ت نَص ِت‬ ِ ‫أن‬
feminine
All of you helped. You two helped. You helped.
ْ َ َ‫ََنْ ُن ن‬ ُ ْ َ َ َ
‫َصنا‬ ‫أنا نَصت‬
first person
both
We helped. I helped.
➢ DRILL 1 Do the ‫ نصر‬chart of the following ‫ أفعال‬orally.
َ َ‫ت‬ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ َّ َ َ‫َكت‬
‫الو َم‬ ‫ِا ْستَ ْم َسك‬ َ َّ ‫ك‬
‫ْب‬ ‫ت‬ ‫َجاهد‬ ‫أ ْسل َم‬ ‫َعل َم‬ ‫َس ِم َع‬ ‫ب‬
➢ DRILL 2 What is the inside pronoun? Pay attention to the endings of each ‫فعل‬.
َ ْ‫ فَ َّر ق‬.6 ْ َ َ َ
‫ت‬ ‫ أ خ ذ ت‬.1
َ َ ْ َّ
‫ أ ك ال‬.7 ‫ اِت بَع نا‬.2
ُ ْ ‫ َم نَن‬.8 ُ ََ
‫ت‬ ‫ ت ف َّر ق ْوا‬.3
ََ‫ك‬ ْ َ ْ ُ ْ َ َّ
‫ْب‬ ‫ اِ س ت‬. 9 ‫ اَِّت ذ ت ْم‬.4
َّ ُ ْ‫ ا َّت َق ي‬.10
‫ت‬
َ
‫ خان تَا‬.5
ِ
72 | P a g e
6.3 ‫الفاعل‬
The ‫ فاعل‬is the doer of the action. There are two types of ‫فاعل‬:
َّ
1) INSIDE ‫ – )الض ِم ْي الم ْس َت ِت( فاعل‬this is the built-in pronoun that every ‫ فعل‬contains.
2) OUTSIDE ‫ – فاعل‬this type of ‫ فاعل‬is used when the doer is someone or something other than a
pronoun (e.g “Muhammad” rather than “he”).
The rules for an outside ‫ فاعل‬are as follows:
1) it must come AFTER the ‫فعل‬

2) it must be ‫مرفوع‬
3) the ‫ فعل‬must be in either the ‫ هو‬form or the ‫ ه‬form
4) the ‫ فعل‬will MATCH the ‫ فاعل‬in GENDER

ُ ْ َ َ َ َ َ َ ‫) ن‬1
The Muslimah helped. ‫الم ْس ِل َمة‬
ُ ‫ت‬ ‫) نَص‬5 The Muslim helped. ‫الم ْس ِل ُم‬
ُ ‫َص‬
‫تان‬ َ ْ ُ ْ َ َ َ ْ ُ َ َ َ
The two Muslimahs helped. ِ ‫) نَصت المس ِلم‬6 The two Muslims helped. ‫مان‬
ِ ‫) نَص المس ِل‬2
ُ ْ َ َ َ َ َ َ َ ‫) ن‬3
The Muslimahs helped. ‫الم ْس ِلمات‬ ُ ‫ت‬ ‫) نَص‬7 The Muslims helped. ‫الم ْس ِل ُم ْون‬ُ ‫َص‬
Notice that only the ‫ هو‬form and the ‫ هي‬form are used despite the variety in the number of the outside
‫فاعل‬. Also notice that the ‫ فعل‬and outside ‫ فاعل‬match in gender.
Know that every ‫ جلمةُفعلية‬must have a ‫فاعل‬, whether it be inside or outside. But you cannot have both.
➢ DRILL 3 Inside or outside doer? If you find an outside doer, circle it. If you find an inside
doer, write out the pronoun.
َ َ َ َ ُ َّ َ َ َ َُ ْ َ‫فَما َرِب‬
I / O ‫قال َُل ُم ْوس‬ I / O ‫َودخل َجنتَه‬ I / O ‫ارت ُه ْم‬ ‫ت ِِت‬ ِ
َ َّ ْ َ َّ َ ُ َ ْ َّ ْ ُ ْ َ َ َ َ‫استَ ْط َعما أَ ْهلَها‬
ْ َ‫ف‬
I / O ‫الر ُس ْول‬ ‫واتبعنا‬ I / O ‫أخذتهم الرجفة‬ I / O
ُ ُ ََ َ َْ َ ُ ُ َ ْ ِّ ‫َعلَّ َمن َر‬

I / O ‫خلقك ْم ِم ْن تراب‬ I / O ‫قال ْوا َربك ْم أعل ُم‬ I / O ‫ّب‬ ِ
73 | P a g e
6.4 ‫المفعول‬
The ‫ مفعول‬is defined as a detail that pertains to the action. The detail refers to additional information
about the action. Such information includes:
- WHO/WHAT the action was DONE TO

- WHERE the action took place
- WHEN the action took place
- HOW the action took place
- WHY the action took place
Take a look at the following example:

Ahmed ate chocolate at home yesterday happily because he was hungry.
action what where when how why
The sentence above contains five details:
1. Chocolate – this tells us WHAT the action was done to

2. At home – this tells us WHERE the action took place
3. Yesterday – this tells us WHEN the action took place
4. Happily – this tells us HOW the action took place
5. Because he was hungry – this tells us WHY the action took place
When searching for a detail in a sentence, follow a two-step process:
1. Identify the action

2. Look at each bit of information in the sentence related to the action and ask yourself:
- Who/what did (doer) (verb)? (e.g. What did Ahmed eat? → chocolate)
- Where did (doer) (verb)? (e.g. Where did Ahmed eat? → at home)
- When did (doer) (verb)? (e.g. When did Ahmed eat? → yesterday)
- How did (doer) (verb)? (e.g. How did Ahmed eat? → happily)
- Why did (doer) (verb)? (e.g. Why did Ahmed eat? → because he was hungry)
The answer to these questions is the ‫مفعول‬. Remember that details are ‫منصوب‬. There are six types of
details (ُ‫) َمفَا ِعيْل‬, each answering a different question.
#1 – ‫المفعول به‬
The ‫ مفعولُبه‬tells you WHO or WHAT was the action done to. This is the most common of the six ‫مفاعيل‬.
The ‫ مفعولُبه‬can take two forms. It can either appear as a regular ‫ اسم‬in the sentence or as a pronoun
attached to the ‫فعل‬.
74 | P a g e
َ َ َّ ‫َخلَ َق‬
‫ماوات َواأل ْرض‬
ِ ‫الس‬
He created the skies and the earth.
What did He create? The skies and the earth.
َ ْ َ َ ََ
‫فأخذهم العذاب‬
Then the punishment took them.
Who did the punishment take? It took them.
Any pronoun that is attached to a ‫ فعل‬is ALWAYS a ‫ مفعولُبه‬and is always ‫فيُمحلُنصب‬.
***Note: when attaching a pronoun to the ‫ أنتم‬form of a ‫فعل‬, a helper ‫ و‬goes between the ‫ فعل‬and the
pronoun to make the pronunciation of the word smoother.
ْ َ َ‫ ه = ن‬+ ‫صت ْم‬

‫صتم ْوه‬ ْ َ َ‫ن‬
➢ DRILL 4 Write the inside pronoun on the first line. Write the attached pronoun on the
second line. Then translate.
Hint: The inside pronoun translates as the doer and the attached pronoun translates as the detail.
َ َ َ ‫ ن‬.1
‫ص ك ْم‬
َّ َ
‫ ع ل ْمناه‬.2
َْ
‫ َسأ تلَه ْم‬.3
َْ
‫ َسأ تل م ْوه َّن‬.4
َ
‫ ك تَبْناها‬.5
َ َ
‫ دخ ل ْوه‬.6
‫خاطبَه ْم‬
َ .7
ْ َ
‫ ق َرأ ناه‬.8
َ َ
ْ‫راد ِن‬ ‫ أ‬.9
75 | P a g e
َ َ َ
‫ أك له‬.10
#2 – ‫المفعول فيه‬
The ‫ مفعولُفيه‬tells you WHEN or WHERE the action took place. It often appears as a special ‫ مضاف‬of time
or place. It can also appear as an ‫ اسم‬that denotes time but is not a ‫مضاف‬. When ‫ في‬appears in a ‫جملةُفعلية‬,
that ‫ جارُمجرور‬is a ‫مفعولُفيه‬.
َ َ َْ
‫َو َرفعنا ف ْوقك ْم الط ْو َر‬
And We raised the mount over you.
َ َ
Where did we raise the mount? Over you. ‫ ف وْ ق‬is a special ‫مضاف‬.
ً َ ْ َ ُ ْ َ َ ِّ
ً َ‫ال َون‬
‫هارا‬ ‫إِِن دعوت قو ِم يل‬
Certainly, I called my people night and day.
When did I call? During the night and the day.‫ يلال‬and ‫ نهارا‬are words that denote time.
َ َ ُ َ
‫الم ِدين ِة‬ ‫َمك ْرت ُم ْو ُه ِف‬
All of you plotted it in the city.
Where did you all plot? In the city. ‫ في‬oftentimes denotes time or place.
#3 – ‫المفعول هل‬
The ‫ مفعولُله‬tells you WHY the action took place. It is often translated as “because of” or “out of” but is
not limited to these translations. Most often, the ‫ مفعولُله‬is a ‫مصدر‬. We will learn to recognize a ‫مصدر‬
when we study ‫صرف‬.
ْ َ ْ ْ َ َ
‫غاء َوجهِ َر لب ِ ِه ْم‬ِ ‫صبوا ابت‬
They persevered for the pleasure of their Master.
Why did they persevere? For the pleasure of their Master.
#4 – ‫المفعول المطلق‬
The ‫ مفعولُمطلق‬has three main functions.
1. to emphasize the action (when the ‫ مفعول مطلق‬is a single word)
76 | P a g e
2. to describe the action (when the ‫ مفعول مطلق‬has a ‫)صفة‬
3. to indicate the number of times an action happened (when the ‫ مفعول مطلق‬has a number)
It appears as a ‫ مصدر‬that shares the same root letters as the ‫فعل‬. Again, we will learn more about this
when we study ‫صرف‬.
ْ َ َّ َ
‫َوَك َم اهلل م ْوىس تكل ِيْما‬
And Allah spoke to Musa directly.
#5 – ‫احلال‬
The ‫ حال‬tells you HOW the action took place. It describes the state of the doer or the action. It often
translates as an adverb (e.g angrily) or as “while” or “as,” but is not limited to these translations.
ْ َ َ
‫فخ َر َج مِنها خائِفا‬
Then he left it fearfully.
In what state did he leave? He left fearfully.
َ َْ
‫َوانقلب ْوا صاغ ِِريْ َن‬
And they returned belittled.
In what state did they return? They returned in the state of being belittled.
***Note that a ‫ جملةُفعلية‬does not require a ‫ مفعول‬to be considered complete. There is no limit to how
many ‫ مفاعيل‬there can be in one sentence.
#6 – ‫المتعلق بالفعل‬
Recall that a ‫ جارُومجرور‬within a ‫ جملةُاسمية‬is labelled as a ‫متعلقُبالخبر‬. Within a ‫جملةُفعلية‬, a ‫ جارُومجرور‬is
labelled as a ‫متعلقُبالفعل‬. Literally, ‫ متعلق‬means “related to” or “associated with”. There are many ‫ أفعال‬that
are associated with a ‫حرف‬.
For example, ‫ظ َُر‬ َ َ‫ن‬, which means to look, comes with ‫إِلى‬. So if we wanted to say “He looked at him,” we
َ
would say ‫ظ َرُإِل ْي ُِه‬َ َ‫ ن‬rather than ُ‫ظ َره‬
َ َ‫ن‬. There are many such examples. A ‫ فعل‬coming with an accompanying
‫ حرف‬is very common.
***Note that ‫ حروف‬that are associated with ‫ أفعال‬do not always have to be translated.
77 | P a g e
ْ ْ ََ
‫نظ َر َبعضه ْم إِىل َبعض‬
They looked at each other.
(lit. Some of them look at some others.)
َْ َ َ َ َّ
‫َصفك ْم عنه ْم‬ ‫ثم‬
And then He averted all of you away from them.
➢ DRILL 5 Underline the ‫ فعل‬once, the ‫ فاعل‬twice, and the ‫متعلقُبالفعل‬/‫ مفعول‬three times. If the
‫ فاعل‬is an inside pronoun, write it out underneath the ‫فعل‬.
َ َ َ ْ َ َ َ َ َ َ ََ
‫ج َعلناه ْم َسلفا َو َمثال ل ِآلخرِيْ َن‬ ‫ف‬ ‫َوق َتل داو ْود َجال ْوت‬ ‫قاتله ْم اهلل‬
َ َْْ َ َ َ ‫َو َع َدك ْم َو ْع َد‬ ْ َ َّ َ َ َ ََ

‫احل ل ِق َو َوع ْدتك ْم فأخلفتك ْم‬ ‫أ ْر َسلنا م ْو َىس بِآيات ِنا‬ ِ‫فأخذه ْم عذاب يَ ْو ِم الظلة‬
6.6 ABNORMAL SENTENC E STRUCTURE

The standard order for a ‫ جملةُفعلية‬is the ‫ فعل‬followed by the ‫ فاعل‬followed by the ‫مفعول‬. Recall that one of
the rules of the ‫ فاعل‬is that it must come AFTER the ‫فعل‬. This holds true even when it comes to abnormal
structures. O NLY the position of the ‫ مفعولُبه‬and the ‫ متعلقُبالفعل‬can be shifted. They can either come
before the ‫ فاعل‬or before the ‫فعل‬.
As for the ‫مفعولُفيه‬, it is flexible in its position and it is not considered abnormal if it is shifted.
ْ َّ َ َ
‫لَع اهلل ِ ت َوَكنا‬
‫فعلُمؤخر‬ ‫متعلقُبالفعلُمقدم‬
We have relied only on Allah
In the example above, the shift in order creates the meaning of exclusivity.
ATTACHED PRONOUNS
When it comes to attached pronouns, it is normal for the attached ‫ مفعولُبه‬to come before the ‫فاعل‬. This
is because it is attached to the ‫ فعل‬and cannot be separated. This is NOT considered an abnormal
structure.
ََ
‫قاتلهم اهلل‬
78 | P a g e
6.7 COMPLEX SENTENCES
HAVING A SENTENCE AS A ‫خب‬
Recall that a ‫ جملةُاسمية‬can act as a ‫خبر‬. Likewise, a ‫ جملةُفعلية‬can also act as a ‫خبر‬. When this occurs, the
entire sentence is labeled as a ‫خبر‬. This is the first tier of sentence-level labeling. As for the second tier,
the sentence is pulled out of the ‫ خبر‬bucket and labeled like any other ‫جملةُفعلية‬. Take a look at the
example below.
ْ َ َ ْ َ َ َّ
ً ْ‫ك َفت‬
‫حا ُم ِبينا‬ ‫إِنا فتحنا ل‬
Certainly We, We have given you a clear victory.

We can now extract the contents of the ‫ خبر‬and label it.
ْ َ َ ْ ََ
ً ْ‫ك َفت‬
‫حا ُم ِبينا‬ ‫فتحنا ل‬
Inside this ‫خبر‬, we have a complete ‫جملةُفعلية‬. On a sentence level, the word ‫ فتحنا‬serves as the ‫ فعل‬as
well as the ‫فاعل‬. The fragment ‫ لك‬is a ‫متعلقُبالفعل‬, and ‫ فتحاُمبينا‬is a ‫مفعولُمطلق‬.
When the ‫ خبر‬is a ‫جملةُفعلية‬, the pronoun inside the ‫ فعل‬must match with the ‫ مبتدأ‬in number and
َّ matches in number and gender with the pronoun
gender. In the example above, the ‫نحن( مبتدأ‬+‫)إن‬
َ
inside the ‫فتَحْ نا( خبر‬.)
Consider the sentence “‫صر ْوا‬

َ َ‫”الم ْسلِم ْونَ ُن‬.
→ The word ‫( المسلمون‬the ‫ )مبتدأ‬is masculine/plural.
→ The masculine plural pronoun is “‫”هم‬.
→ The inside pronoun in the sentence ‫صروا‬

َ َ‫( ن‬the ‫ )خبر‬is ‫هم‬.
→ The ‫ مبتدأ‬and ‫ خبر‬match in number and gender.
➢ DRILL 6 Convert the following ‫ جملُفعلية‬into ‫جملُاسمية‬. Remember to match the ‫ مبتدأ‬and the
‫خبر‬. The first one is done as an example.
ُ َ َ ‫الم ْس ِل ُم ْو َن ن‬
‫َص ْوا‬ ُ َ
‫الم ْس ِل ُم ْو ن‬
ُ ‫َص‬َ َ َ‫ن‬
ُ ِّ ‫ت الن‬
‫ساء‬ ْ َ‫َك تَب‬
‫ان‬ َّ َ َ َ
ِ ‫ح َض الط ِابل‬
‫ان‬ َّ ُ ْ َ َ ْ َ ْ
ِ ‫اِس ت م ت ع ت األم‬
َّ َ ‫ب َ َد أ‬
‫اَل ْر ُس‬
79 | P a g e
QUOTES
Quotes in Arabic are considered to be a type of ‫مفعولُبه‬, because they answer the question “What did x
ُِ ‫ َمق ْولُالقَ ْو‬.
say?” The term for this in Arabic is ‫ل‬
A ‫ مقولُالقول‬can contain either a ‫ جملةُاسمية‬or a ‫جملةُفعلية‬.

ُ ِّ ُ َ َ
‫الل ِإِن َم َعك ْم‬ ‫وقال‬
And Allah said, “Certainly, I am with all of you”.
Here, the ‫ مقول القول‬is a simple ‫ جملة اسمية‬that contains a ‫ مبتدأ‬and a ‫متعلق بالخب‬.
In some cases, the ‫ مقولُالقول‬does not always have to be a sentence. Take a look at the example below.
َ ُ
‫قال ْوا ن َع ْم‬
They said, “yes”.
6.8 QUESTION WORDS
In Arabic, most question words have no grammatical effect and can simply be added to the beginning of
a sentence, both ‫ اسمية‬and ‫فعلية‬.
Below are some commonly used question words and their definitions.
َ َ َْ َ َ َ
‫أي‬ ‫ أ‬/‫هل‬ ‫كيْف‬ ‫ل ِماذا‬ ‫أ ْي َن‬ ‫َم َت‬ ‫ ما‬/‫ماذا‬ ‫َم ْن‬
which did how why where when what who
Take a look at how these question words are used with a ‫جملةُفعلية‬
َ
Who studied? ‫َم ْن د َر َس؟‬
Did Zaynab study? ‫ب؟‬ُ َ‫ت َزيْن‬ ْ ‫ أَ َد َر َس‬/‫َهل‬
When did Zaynab study? ‫ب؟‬ ُ َ‫ت َزيْن‬ ْ ‫َمّت َد َر َس‬

ُ ََْ ْ َ َ َ َ َْ
Where did Zaynab study? ‫أين درست زينب؟‬
‫ب؟‬ ُ َ‫ت َزيْن‬ ْ ‫ملاذا َد َر َس‬
Why did Zaynab study? ِ
ُ َ‫ت َزيْن‬ ْ ‫كيْف َد َر َس‬ َ َ
How did Zaynab study? ‫ب؟‬
What did Zaynab study?
ُ َ‫ت َزيْن‬
‫ب؟‬ ْ ‫ما َد َر َس‬/‫ماذا‬
At which school did Zaynab study?

ُ َ‫ت َزيْن‬
‫ب‬ ْ ‫ف أَ ِّي َم ْد َر َسة َد َر َس‬
ْ ِ
Take a look at how these question words are used with a ‫جملةُاسمية‬
80 | P a g e
ُ
Who is he? ‫َم ْن ه َو؟‬
ٌ ُ َ
Is he present? ‫هل ه َو َم ْو ُج ْود؟‬
ُ
When is it? ‫َمّت ه َو؟‬
َْ
Where is it? ‫أي َن ه َوُ؟‬
ٌ ُ
Why is he here? ‫ِملاذا ه َو َم ْو ُج ْود؟‬
ُ
What is it? ‫ما ه َو؟‬/‫ماذا‬
Note that when َُ‫ أَيْن‬or ‫ ما‬are used with a sentence that has a ‫ جارُومجرور‬in it, the ‫ حرفُجر‬comes before
the question word.
In the case of ‫ما‬, the ‫ حرفُجر‬merges with the ‫ ما‬and the ‫ ا‬is omitted and replaced with a ‫فتحة‬.
Take a look at the examples below.
ُ َْ
Where is he from? ‫ِم ْن أي َن ه َو؟‬
The ‫)م ْن ( حرف جر‬

ِ comes before the question word (‫)أين‬.
َ ُ َ َ َ َّ َ
What are they asking each other about? ‫ساءل ْون؟‬ ‫عم ي ت‬
َ
The ‫ )ع ْن ( حرف جر‬comes before the question word (‫)ما‬. The ‫ ا‬is replaced with a ‫ـ‬.َ
ُْ
What were you all in? ‫ِفيْ َم كنتُ ْم؟‬
The ‫)ف ( حرف جر‬ َ

ِ comes before the question word (‫)ما‬. The ‫ ا‬is replaced with a ‫ـ‬.
For what (reason) did you give them permission? ُ ‫ِل َم أ َ ِذ ْنتَ ُلَه ُْم؟‬
‫ ِل َم‬translates literally as “for what” but can be translated more naturally as “why”.
81 | P a g e
ُ ْ َ ٌ ‫َع َذ‬ ٌ ‫ع َق‬
‫أج ٌر – أ ُج ْو ٌر‬ ٌ ‫َج َز‬
‫اء‬ ‫اب‬ ‫اب‬ ِ
reward compensation torment punishment
ٌ‫ب – ُذنُ ْوب‬
ٌ ْ‫َذن‬ ٌ ‫ثَ َو‬ ْ ٌ ‫ح َس‬
‫اب‬ ‫ِإث ٌم‬ ‫اب‬ ِ
sin reward sin accounting/reckoning
ٌ ْ‫َوق‬
‫ت‬
ٌْ
‫َضعف‬
ٌ ُ
‫ق َّوة‬
َْ
‫تق َوى‬
time weakness strength piety
3-LETTER
‫َض ُح ُض ْو ًرا‬ ُ ُ ْ‫ََي‬ َ َ ‫َح‬

‫َض‬ ‫حا‬ ً ْ‫َفتَ َح َي ْفتَ ُح َفت‬
to attend to open
َ ُ ُ‫َي ْطل‬ َ َ‫َطل‬ ً ُ َ َ
to request ‫ب َطلبًا‬ ‫ب‬ to start ‫بَ َدأ يبْ َدأ بِدايَة‬
ً َ ُ ْ َ‫ي‬ َ ً َ ْ َ ُ َ َْ َ َ َ
to leave ‫ْت ُك ت ْراك‬ ‫ت َر َك‬ to advise ‫حة‬ ‫نصح ينصح ن ِصي‬
َ ُ َ َْ َ َ ْ ُ َ ْ َ ‫ََش َب ي‬
to get angry ‫ب غ َضبًا‬ ‫غ ِضب يغض‬ to drink ‫َش ًبا‬ ‫ْش ُب‬ ِ
ًْ ُ ُ ُ ْ َ َ َ َ
)‫بي‬/‫حكم َيكم حكما (َع‬ ً‫لَب َس يَلْبَ ُس بلاسا‬
to judge to wear ِ ِ
َ ُ َ ْ َ ََ َ
‫َسك َن ي َ ْسك ُن َسكنًا‬ ً ْ َ ُ
to reside/settle to be patient )‫صْب يص ِْب صْبا (َع‬
ً َ ُ َْ َ ْ ُ َْ َ َ
to work ‫َع ِمل يع َمل ع َمال‬ to oppress ‫ظل َم يظ ِل ُم ظل ًما‬
ً ْ َ ُ ُ ْ َ َ َ َْ ْ َ
to take ‫أخذ يَأخذ أخذا‬ to command ‫أ َم َر يَأ ُم ُر أم ًرا‬
FAMILY II
ْ ْ َ ِّ َ َّ َ ً ْ ْ َ ُ ِّ َ َّ
to deny/belie ‫كذ َب يُكذ ُب تك ِذيبًا‬ to affirm ‫َصدق يُ َصدق تص ِديقا‬
FAMILY III
ًََ َُ ً ُ ُ ََ
to argue )‫ ف‬،‫َجادل ْيَا ِدل ِج َداال َوَمادلة (ـه‬
FAMILY IV
ً ْ ُْ َْ ًَ َ ُْ ُ َ ََ
to corrupt (s/t) ‫أف َس َد يف ِس ُد ِإف َسادا‬ to want/intend ‫أراد ي ِريد إِرادة‬
ً ْ ُ ْ َ ْ َ ً ْ ْ َ
to complete ‫أك َمل يُك ِمل ِإك َماال‬ to believe )‫ءام َن يُؤ ِم ُن ِإي َمانا (بـ‬
FAMILY V
َ َ َّ َ َ َّ َ َ
to speak/talk )‫تكل َم يتََك ُم تكل ًما (مع‬
FAMILY VIII
ً ‫ا ْنتَ َظ َر يَنْتَظ ُر انْت َظ‬
)‫ارا (ـه‬
to wait ِ ِ ِ ِ
‫اِلروف انلاصبة للمضارع‬ ‫اِلروف اجلازمة للمضارع‬

َْ ْ
To ‫أن‬ If ‫ِإن‬
َْ
Will not ‫لن‬
َْ
Did not ‫لم‬
So that, in order to ْ‫ِل َك‬ Not yet ‫لما‬

َّ َ
َْ
Until, to the point that, so that ‫َح َّّت‬ And should ‫ولـ‬
َْ
Then should ‫فلـ‬
Should ‫ِلـ‬
+ ‫قد‬ َ َ
Qur’anic Arabic: certainly
‫ مضارع‬+ ‫قد‬ have/already will ‫ مضارع‬+ ‫س ْوف‬/‫سـ‬
Modern Arabic: might ‫ماض‬
‫املصطلحات‬
ٌ َ ُ ٌْ
‫ارع‬
ِ ‫ ِفعل مض‬a present tense ‫فعل‬
َْ ُْ
‫ ِفعل أمر‬a commanding ‫فعل‬
ْ َ ُْ
‫ ِفعل نه‬a forbidding ‫فعل‬
ٌ ُ ٌ َ ُ ٌْ
‫ارع َم ْرف ْوع‬
ِ ‫ فِعل مض‬a normal present tense ‫فعل‬
ْ ٌ َ ُ ٌْ
‫ارع َمن ُص ْو ٌب‬
ِ ‫ فِعل مض‬a light present tense ‫فعل‬
َْ ٌ َ ُ ٌْ
‫ارع َم ُز ْو ٌم‬
ِ ‫ فِعل مض‬a lightest present tense ‫فعل‬
ُ
‫اصبَة‬ َّ ‫ حرف اِل ُ ُر ْو ُف‬of light
ِ ‫انل‬
ُ َ ُْ ُُ
‫از َمة‬
ِ ‫ حرف اِلروف اجل‬of lightest
CHAPTER 7 – ‫الفعل المضارع‬
7.1 INTRODUCTION
Recall that ‫ الفعل المضارع‬is used to express actions occurring in the present tense or future tense. In terms
of usage and sentence structure, all the rules of ‫ الجملة الفعلية‬apply when it comes to ‫ الفعل المضارع‬as well. In
this chapter, we will cover the ‫ فعل مضارع‬chart as well as a few concepts that are unique to ‫الفعل المضارع‬.
7.2 ‫الفعل المضارع‬

Recall that when it came to ‫الفعل الماضي‬, only the endings changed. Observe how the ENDING AND
BEGINNING of each ‫ فعل‬changes depending on the pronoun when it comes to ‫المضارع‬. MEMORIZE all of the
‫ أفعال‬in the chart below along with their corresponding pronouns.

َ ُ ُ َْ ْ ُ ُ ْ‫ُهما َين‬ ُ ُ ْ‫ُه َو َين‬
‫َص ْون‬ ‫هم ي ن‬ ‫ان‬
ِ ‫َص‬ ‫َص‬
masculine
third person
They help. Both of them help. He helps.

َ ْ ُ ْ َ َّ ُ ُ َْ ُ ُ ُ ْ‫ه َتن‬
َ ِ
‫ــرن‬ ‫هن ينص‬ ‫ان‬
ِ ‫هما تنَص‬ ‫َص‬
feminine
They help. Both of them help. She helps.
َ ْ ُ ُ َْ ْ َُْ ُ َْ َُْ َ ْ‫أَن‬

ُ‫ت َتنْ َُص‬
‫أنتم تنَصون‬ ‫ان‬
ِ ‫أنتما تنَص‬
masculine
second person
َ ْ ُ ْ َ َّ ُ ْ َ َْ َُْ َ‫أَنْت َتنْ َُصيْن‬

All of you help. You two help. You help.
‫أنت تنَصن‬ ‫ان‬ ُ

ِ ‫أنتما تنَص‬ ِ ِ
feminine
All of you help. You two help. You help.
ُ‫ََنْ ُن َننْ َُص‬ ُ‫أَنا أَنْ َُص‬

first person
both
We help. I help.
Notice that ‫ الفعل المضارع‬ALWAYS begins with one of four letters. They are ‫أ ي ت ن‬. The ‫ حركة‬on these
letters can be a ‫ فتحة‬or a ‫ضمة‬. Whichever it is, that ‫ حركة‬will remain the same throughout the chart.
Remember that you are looking at the beginning and ending of each ‫ فعل‬to determine the inside
pronoun. Use the following code to help you.
84 | P a g e
َ
‫ ون‬+ ‫ي‬ ‫ان‬
ِ +‫ي‬ ‫ ُـ‬+ ‫ي‬
َ
‫ن‬+‫ي‬ ‫ان‬
ِ +‫ت‬ ‫ ُـ‬+ ‫ت‬
َ
‫ ون‬+ ‫ت‬ ‫ان‬
ِ +‫ت‬ ‫ ُـ‬+ ‫ت‬
َ ْ
‫ن‬+‫ت‬ ‫ان‬
ِ +‫ت‬ ‫ ِي َن‬+ ‫ت‬
‫ ُـ‬+ ‫ن‬ ‫ ُـ‬+ ‫أ‬
➢ DRILL 1 Do the ‫ نصر‬chart of the following ‫ أفعال‬orally.
َ َ‫َيت‬ ُ َ ََ ُ ِّ ُ ْ َ
‫الو ُم‬ ‫ي َ ْستَ ْم ِسك‬ ُ َّ ‫ك‬
‫ْب‬ ‫يت‬ ‫ْيا ِه ُد‬ ‫ي ُ ْس ِل ُم‬ ‫ي َعل ُم‬ ‫ي َ ْس َم ُع‬ ُ ُ‫كت‬
‫ب‬ ‫ي‬
➢ DRILL 2 What is the inside pronoun? Pay attention to the beginning and ending of each
‫فعل‬.
‫عان‬ َ ََ َ ُ َْ ْ َ
‫ْش ْو ن‬
ِ ‫ ي ْتاج‬.11 ِ ‫ ي س ت ب‬.6
َ ْ َ ْ
‫ ت ع ل ُم‬.12 ‫ ي َك تُ ُم‬.7
ُ ‫ أ ُن َب‬.13
‫ئ‬
ُ ِّ َ ُ
‫ْن ل‬ ‫ ن‬.8
ِ
َ ْ َ ُْ
‫ ي َش َه ُد ْو ن‬.14 ‫ ت ؤ ِم نُ ْو ن‬.9
ُ ُ ْ َْ
‫ ِت ا ِد ل‬.15 ‫رس ق َن‬ِ ‫ ي‬.10
7.3 ‫ حروف‬ASSOCIATED WITH ‫الفعل المضارع‬

‫ الفعل المضارع‬differs from ‫ الفعل الماضي‬in that it can take on different “statuses” or forms. Recall that when
it comes to the ‫اسم‬, there are certain ‫حروف‬, like ‫ حروف الجر‬and ‫حروف النصب‬, that can come before it and
change its status. Similarly, there are certain ‫ حروف‬that can come before a ‫ فعل مضارع‬and affect its
“status” or its form. This is not the case with ‫الفعل الماضي‬, which never changes.
‫ الفعل المضارع‬can take on three forms. They are:
1) NORMAL (‫ – )مرفوع‬This is the DEFAULT form of the ‫ فعل‬when there is no ‫ حرف‬affecting it.
2) LIGHT (‫ – )منصوب‬This is the form the ‫ فعل‬takes when affected by ‫الحروف الناصبة للمضارع‬.
3) LIGHTEST (‫ – )مجزوم‬This is the form that the ‫ فعل‬takes when affected by ‫الحروف الجازمة للمضارع‬.
Then let us learn these two sets of ‫حروف‬. Then let us learn how to construct the light and lightest forms.
85 | P a g e
LIGHT
MEMORIZE ‫ الحروف الناصبة للمضارع‬along with their meanings.
َْ
To ‫أن‬
َ
Will not ‫ل ْن‬
So that, in order to ْ‫ِل َك‬
Until, to the point that, so that ‫َح َّّت‬
***Note
➔ ‫ لكي‬is a compound ‫حرف‬. The ‫ الم‬can be used on its own and so can ‫كَي‬, or they can be used
together. The meaning remains the same.
➔ ‫ حتى‬can come before a ‫ فعل ماض‬as well. In this case, it means “until” or “to the point that”. Since
‫ الفعل الماضي‬does not change, the ‫ حرف‬has no effect.
To make a ‫ فعل‬light (‫)منصوب‬:
1) If it ends in a ‫ضمة‬, change it to a ‫فتحة‬

2) If it ends in a ‫ن‬, get rid of the ‫ن‬
3) The ‫ هن‬and ‫ أنتن‬forms ALWAYS remain the same
ُ ُ ْ‫َين‬
‫َص ْوا‬
َْ
‫ين َُصا‬ َ ُ ْ‫َين‬
‫َص‬
َ ْ ُ َْ َْ َ ُ ْ‫َتن‬
‫َصن‬ ‫ين‬ ‫تن َُصا‬ ‫َص‬
‫َص ْوا‬ُ ُ ْ‫َتن‬ َْ
‫تن َُصا‬ َ ُ ْ‫َتن‬
‫َص‬
َ ْ ُ َْ َْ ُ َْ
‫َصن‬ ‫تن‬ ‫تن َُصا‬ ‫َص ْي‬ِ ‫تن‬
َ ُ ْ‫َنن‬
‫َص‬ َ‫أَنْ َُص‬
Take a look at the following examples. Notice how the ‫ حروف‬affect the ‫ أفعال‬after them.
َ َ ْ َْ ْ
ِ ‫ي ِريد أن ُي ِرجك ِم م ِْن أ ْر‬
‫ضك ْم‬
He wants to expel you all from your land.
َْ َ ْ
‫قل ل ْن َينف َعك ْم الفِرار‬
Say, “Fleeing will not benefit you all.”
86 | P a g e
َّ َ ‫ل‬ َ َ ْ ‫َََْ ْ َْ َ ل‬
ِ ‫وأنزنلا إِيلك اَّلِكر تلِ ب ِي ل ِلن‬
‫اس‬
We sent down the reminder so that you can clarify for the people
ْ َ َ َ ‫َْ َ ل‬
‫حك كثِيا‬ ِ ‫ك نس ب‬
So that we can glorify You a lot.
ْ َْ َ ْ َ َ َّ
‫ِإَونا ل ْن ندخلها َح َّت ُيرج ْوا مِنها‬
We definitely will not enter it until they exit from it.
َْ َ َ ْ ْ َ َ
ِ‫جاء أمر اهلل‬ ‫مان َح َّت‬ َّ
ِ ‫وغرتكم األ‬
False hopes deluded you until the command of Allah came.
Notice that ‫ حتى‬is followed by a ‫فعل ماض‬.
LIGHTEST
MEMORIZE ‫ الحروف الجازمة للمضارع‬along with their meanings.
ْ
If ‫إِن‬
َ
Did not ‫ل ْم‬
َ
Not yet ‫ل َّما‬
ْ
And should ‫َولـ‬
َْ
Then should ‫فلـ‬
Should ‫ل ِـ‬
***Note
➔ ‫ إن‬can sometimes affect two ‫ فعل‬and gives an “if, then” meaning

➔ ‫ لم‬gives a past-tense meaning (did not) despite the fact that it comes only before a ‫فعل مضارع‬.
➔ Also know that ‫ لما‬can come before a ‫فعل ماض‬. In this case, it means “when” and has no effect on
the ‫فعل‬.
87 | P a g e
To make a ‫ فعل‬lightest (‫)مجزوم‬:
1) If it ends in a ‫ضمة‬, change it to a ‫سكون‬

2) If it ends in a ‫ن‬, get rid of the ‫ن‬
3) The ‫ هن‬and ‫ أنتن‬forms ALWAYS remain the same
ْ ْ ْ ْ‫َين‬
‫َينص ْوا‬ ‫َينصا‬ ‫ص‬
َ ْ َْ َْ ْ ْ‫َتن‬
‫صن‬ ‫ين‬ ‫تنصا‬ ‫ص‬
َْ َْ ْ ْ‫َتن‬
‫تنص ْوا‬ ‫تنصا‬ ‫ص‬
َ ْ َْ َْ ْ ‫َتنْص‬
‫صن‬ ‫تن‬ ‫تنصا‬ ‫ي‬ ِ
ْ ْ‫َنن‬
‫ص‬ ْ‫َأنْص‬
Take a look at the following examples. Notice how the ‫ حروف‬affect the ‫ أفعال‬after them
َ ‫إ َن َتنْص ْوا‬
ْ ْ‫اهلل َين‬
‫صك ْم‬ ِ
If you aid Allah, He will aid you.
Notice that that ‫ إن‬is affecting two words: (‫ )تنصروا‬and (‫)ينصر كم‬.
ْ ْ‫َْ َل‬
‫نل بِهِ سلطانا‬
ِ ‫لم ي‬
He did not send down any authority for it.
َ ْ ْ َ َّ َ
‫ذاب‬
ِ ‫ع‬ ‫لما يذوقوا‬
They have not yet tasted My punishment.
َ َ َّ َ َ
ِ‫قام عبْد اهلل‬ ‫ولما‬
And when the slave of Allah stood up.
Notice that ‫ لَ َّما‬is followed by a ‫فعل ماض‬. In this case, it translates as “when” and has no effect on the ‫فعل‬.
88 | P a g e
ْ ْ ْ ْ ْ َ ْ ََْ
‫ىل َويلؤمِن ْوا ِب‬
ِ ‫جيبوا‬
ِ ‫فليست‬
So then they should respond to me and they should believe in me
.
َ ْ ‫ِيلَ َت َف َّقه ْوا ِف ل‬
‫الِي ْ ِن َو ِيلنذِر ْوا ق ْو َمه ْم‬ ِ
They should obtain a deep understanding of the religion and they should warn their people.
➢ DRILL 3 Give the light and lightest form of each ‫فعل‬.
L IGHTEST L IGHT
َ ْ
‫ ت ؤمِن ْو ن‬.1
َ َ
‫ ت عْ ل م‬.2
‫ ن َ ل‬.3
‫ن ِل‬
‫اج عا ِن‬َ ‫ ي َ َت‬.4
ْ
‫ ي َ ْْسِق َن‬.5
HOW TO RECOGNIZE A L I G H T /L I G H T E S T ‫فعل‬
if a ‫ فعل‬ends in… then it originally had a… so the possible pronouns are…

َ ‫هو ه‬
‫أنت أنا َنن‬
َ‫ـ‬ or ‫ـ‬ ‫ــ‬
‫ـا‬ ‫هما أنتما‬
‫و‬ ‫ن‬ ‫هم أنتم‬
‫ي‬ ‫أنت‬
ِ
‫ْـ َن‬ ‫ْـ َن‬ ‫هن أنت‬
7.4 COMMANDING AND F ORBIDDING

Recall that there are three types of ‫فعل‬. We have already learned about ‫ الفعل الماضي‬and ‫الفعل المضارع‬. The
third on the list is ‫فعل األمر‬, the commanding ‫فعل‬. The forbidding ‫فعل‬, ‫فعل النهي‬, is considered a type of
89 | P a g e
command, which is why it is grouped together with ‫فعل األمر‬. Both of these types are constructed using
‫ الفعل المضارع‬as a frame, which is why they are usually studied alongside ‫الفعل المضارع‬.
When it comes to commanding and forbidding, we are concerned only with the SECOND PERSON
PRONOUNS ( َ‫ أَنت‬through ‫ ) أَنت َّن‬because you cannot command or forbid yourself (first person) or someone
who is not present (third person).
F O R B I D D I N G – ‫فعل انليه‬
We will begin by learning how to construct ‫النهي‬, because it is simpler. Follow a three-step process:
1) Begin with your ‫ فعل‬in the SECOND -PERSON ‫ مضارع‬FORM and make sure that the pronoun matches
with the one being forbidden
2) Put the ‫ فعل‬in the LIGHTEST FORM
3) Put a “‫ ”ال‬in front of the ‫فعل‬
If you wanted to command Maryam not to help, for instance, you would follow this process:
Start off with Put a ‫ ال‬in front of

normal 2nd Make lightest:
the ‫فعل‬:
‫ال‬
person:
‫َص ْي‬ُ َْ
‫صيْ َن‬
َْ ِ ‫تن‬
ِ ‫ال تن‬
ِ ‫تن‬
ِ ‫تن‬
Below is the forbidding chart. MEMORIZE it along with the pronouns and meanings.
ُ ُ ْ‫أَ ْنتُ ْم ال َتن‬

ْ‫َصوا‬ ُ َْ ُ َْ
‫أنتما ال تنَصا‬ َ ْ‫أَن‬
ْ‫ت ال َتنْ َُص‬
masculine
َ ْ ُ ْ َ َّ ُ ْ َ َْ ْ‫أَنْت ال َتنْ َُصي‬
All of you don’t help! You two don’t help! You don’t help!
ُ َْ ُ
‫أنت ال تنَصن‬ ‫أنتما ال تنَصا‬ ِ ِ
feminine
HOW TO RECOGNIZE A ‫فعل نيه‬

In order for a ‫ فعل‬to be a ‫فعل نهي‬, look for two things:
1. a ‫ال‬
2. a ‫ فعل‬that is lightest
Note that “‫ ”ال‬can be used to negate a ‫ فعل مضارع‬as well as to forbid. If the ‫ فعل‬following the “‫ ”ال‬is NOT in
the lightest form, it is negation, NOT forbidding. Negation differs from forbidding in that it is a simple
statement of fact or an observation, whereas ‫ فعل النهي‬demands action from the listener by forbidding.
‫ال ت َنص ِري‬, for example, is in the forbidding form because it is lightest. It translates as “Don’t help!”
90 | P a g e
Compare this to َ‫ال ت َنص ِريِن‬, which is not lightest. It is a negative statement that translates as “You do not
help”.
Both occur frequently in the Quran, so learning how to distinguish between them is important.
➢ DRILL 4 Is the following in the forbidding form (F) or is it a statement (S)?

ْ َْ ً َ َ ُ
F / S ‫ال ت ق ُع د‬ F / S ‫َو ال ي َنال ْو ن ِم ْن َع ُد ٍّو ن ي ْال‬
َ ْ
‫ال ي ُؤ ِم نُ ْو ن ب ِ ِه‬ ‫ان‬ ََْ َ
F / S F / S ِ ‫ف ال ت ن ت َِص‬
َّ ََ ُ َُ ً َ َُ
F / S ‫ال ت ق ْو ل ْوا َع اللِ إِال اِل َ َّق‬ F / S ‫ال ت ق ْم ِف يْ ِه أ ب َد ا‬
X SHOULD NOT Y
Recall that it is not possible to directly forbid someone who is not present. It is, however, possible to say
“someone should not do something.” This is what is known as an indirect forbidding or a third person
forbidding.
ُ ُ ْ‫ُه ْم ال َين‬
‫َص ْوا‬
َْ ُ
‫هما ال ين َُصا‬ ْ ُ ْ‫ُه َو ال َين‬
‫َص‬
masculine
They should not help. They (2) should not help. He should not help.
َ ْ ُ ْ َ َّ ُ َْ ُ ْ ُ ْ‫ه ال َتن‬
‫َصن‬ ‫هن ال ين‬ ‫هما ال تن َُصا‬ ‫َص‬ َ ِ
feminine
They should not help. They (2) should not help. She should not help.
Remember to look for an outside ‫ فاعل‬if the one being forbidden is not a pronoun. Take a look at the
following examples.
َ
َ‫خ ْذ الم ْؤمِن ْو َن الاكف ِريْ َن أ ْو ِيلاء‬ َّ
ِ ‫ال َيت‬
ِ
The believers should not take the disbelievers as friends.
ْ َ ْ َْ َ
‫فال َيزنك كفره‬
His disbelief should not sadden you.
C O M M A N D I N G – ‫فعل األمر‬
Use the following process to construct a command:
1) Begin with your ‫ فعل‬in the second-person ‫ مضارع‬form and make sure that the pronoun matches
with the one being commanded
2) Put the ‫ فعل‬in the lightest form
3) Remove the ‫ت‬, the first letter of the ‫فعل‬
IF the new first letter after removing the ‫ ت‬has something OTHER THAN a ‫ سكون‬on it, your job is done.
91 | P a g e
IF the new first letter after removing the ‫ ت‬has a ‫ سكون‬on it, then it is impossible to pronounce, so the
following steps must be taken in order to make it pronounceable.
4) Add a helper ‫ ا‬to the front of the word

5) Put a ‫ حركة‬on the helper ‫ألف‬
a. If the second to last letter on the ‫ هو‬form is a ‫ضمة‬, the helper ‫ ألف‬also gets a ‫ضمة‬
b. If it is a ‫ فتحة‬or a ‫كسرة‬, the helper ‫ ألف‬gets a ‫كسرة‬
MEMORIZE the chart below.
ُ ُ ْ‫أَ ْنتُ ْم اُن‬

ْ‫َصوا‬ ُ ُْ َُْ
‫أنتما انَصا‬ َ ْ‫أَن‬
ْ‫ت اُنْ َُص‬
masculine
َ ْ ُ ْ ُ َّ ُ ْ َ ُْ َُْ ْ‫أَنْت اُنْ َُصي‬
‫أنت انَصن‬ ُ
‫أنتما انَصا‬ ِ ِ
feminine
Now take a look at the following examples.
GO! ( َ‫)أنت‬
Determine ‫حركة‬
ْ ‫ا ِذْ َه‬
Start off with
Remove first ‫ت‬:
‫ب‬
normal 2nd Make lightest:
for helper ‫ألف‬:
person:
‫ب‬ْ ‫تَ ْذ َه‬ ْ ‫ذْ َه‬
َ َْ ‫ب‬ ْ ‫اذْ َه‬
‫تذهب‬ ‫ب‬
AID! (‫)أنتن‬
Start off with Determine ‫حركة‬

Make lightest: Remove first ‫ت‬: َ ْ ْ
‫صن‬ ‫ان‬
normal 2nd
for helper ‫ألف‬:
person: َ ْ َْ َ ْ ْ
‫صن‬ ‫تن‬ ‫صن‬ ‫ن‬
َ ْ َْ َ ْ ْ
‫صن‬ ‫تن‬ ‫صن‬ ‫ان‬
LEARN! (‫ت‬
ِ ‫)أن‬
ْ‫َت َعلَّ ِم‬

Start off with
normal 2nd Make lightest: Remove first ‫ت‬: No need for
person: ْ ِ َّ‫َتتَ َعل‬
‫م‬ ْ ِ َّ‫َت َعل‬ helper ‫!ألف‬
َ ْ ‫َت َت َع َّلم‬ ‫م‬
‫ي‬ ِ
Note that the helper ‫ ألف‬is not pronounced when reading Quran if there is a word before it. The ‫ حركة‬is
not written on the ‫ ألف‬in the Uthmani script.
92 | P a g e
Also note that commands in the ‫ أَسلَ َم‬family always begin with a َ ‫أ‬. This is the only exception to the rules
mentioned above. We will learn more about this family when we study ‫صرف‬. For now, know that if a ‫فعل‬
rhymes with ‫ أَسلَ َم‬in the past-tense and ‫ يسلِم‬in the present-tense, it is from the ‫ أّسلَ َم‬family.
Note that in your vocabulary, the words from the ‫ أسلم‬family are under “F A M I L Y IV ”. It will always be
written as َ ‫أ‬.
WARN! (‫)أنتم‬
ْ‫َأن ْ ِذروا‬
Start off with Remove first Add ‫ أسلم‬family
normal 2nd Make lightest: ‫ت‬: ‫همزة‬:
ْ
‫تنذِر ْوا‬
person:
َ ْ ْ
‫نذِر ْوا‬ َْ
‫تنذِر ْون‬ ‫أنذِر ْوا‬
➢ DRILL 5 Give the commanding and forbidding form of each ‫فعل‬.
COMMANDING F ORBIDDING
َ ُ َْ ْ َ
‫ْش ْو ن‬ ِ ‫ ي س ت ب‬.1
َ ْ َ
‫ ت ع ل ُم‬.2
‫ي‬َ ْ ‫ْن ل‬ ِّ َ ُ
ِ ‫ ت‬.3
‫عان‬ َ ََ
ِ ‫ ت ْتاج‬.4
ْ َْ
‫رس ق َن‬ ِ ‫ ي‬.5
7.6 ABNORMAL SENTENCE ST RUCTURE

All the rules of abnormal sentence structure that apply to the ‫ ماض‬also apply to ‫ مضارع‬and ‫أمر‬.
There is, however, one structure in particular that occurs with ‫ الفعل المضارع‬and ‫ فعل األمر‬and does not
occur with ‫الفعل الماضي‬.
When it comes to ‫ الفعل المضارع‬and ‫فعل األمر‬, it is possible to move the ‫ مفعول به‬before the ‫فعل‬, even if the
‫ مفعول به‬is a pronoun. This is done through the use of a place-holder, ‫ِإيّا‬
ْ َ َ َّ َْ َ ‫ل‬
‫اك ن ْس َت ِعي‬‫اك نعبد ِإَوي‬ ‫إِي‬
We worship You alone and we rely on You alone.
This placeholder is also used when doing ‫ عطف‬or a pronoun onto another pronoun.
93 | P a g e
َ َْ
‫َنن ن ْرزقه ْم ِإَويلاك ْم‬
We will provide for them and for you all.
7.7 ‫نون اتلوكيد‬

Another structure that is not relevant to ‫ ماض‬and occurs only with ‫ مضارع‬and ‫ نهي‬is the ‫ نون‬of emphasis
(‫)نون التوكيد‬. This is a ‫ نون‬which is attached to the end of a ‫ فعل مضارع‬to emphasize the action. It is often
accompanied by ‫الم التوكيد‬.
Note that a ‫ فعل‬that has a ‫ نون التوكيد‬will always translate in the future tense.
‫الفعل المضارع المؤكد‬

To add one level of emphasis to a ‫فعل مضارع‬, one ‫ ن‬is added to the end of the ‫فعل‬. This is known as ‫نون‬
‫( التوكيد الخفيفة‬the light ‫ نون‬of emphasis).
To add two levels of emphasis to a ‫فعل مضارع‬, two ‫ نون‬are added. This is known as ‫( نون التوكيد الثقيلة‬the
heavy ‫ نون‬of emphasis).
The light ‫ نون‬of emphasis only occurs twice in the Quran, while the heavy ‫ نون‬of emphasis occurs
countless times. For this reason, we will focus on that.
Take a look at the chart below. The frequently used forms are highlighted. Familiarize yourself with
them.
َّ ْ ‫ل‬ َْ َّ َ ْ َ
‫هم َينصن‬ ‫ان‬ ِ ‫هما ينص‬ ‫صن‬ ‫هو ين‬
‫َْ َْ ل‬ ‫ل‬ َْ َّ َ ْ َ
‫ان‬ِ ‫هن ينصن‬ ‫ان‬ ِ ‫هما تنص‬ ‫صن‬ ‫ه تن‬
َّ ْ َ ‫ل‬ َْ َّ َ ْ َ َ
‫أنتم تنصن‬ ‫ان‬
ِ ‫أنتما تنص‬ ‫صن‬ ‫أنت تن‬
‫َْ ْ ل‬ ‫ل‬ َْ َّ ْ َ
‫نان‬
ِ ‫أنت تنص‬ ‫ان‬
ِ ‫أنتما تنص‬ ‫صن‬ِ ‫أنت تن‬
ِ
َّ َ ْ َ َّ َ ْ َ
‫صن‬ ‫َنن نن‬ ‫أنا أنصن‬
Notice that when the original ‫ فعل‬has a ‫ و‬as part of the ending (‫أنتم‬/‫)هم‬, it is replaced with a ‫ ضمة‬when the
‫ نون‬is added.
When the original ends in a ‫نحن( ضمة‬/‫أنا‬/ َ‫أنت‬/‫هي‬/‫)هو‬, it is replaced with a ‫ فتحة‬when the ‫ نون‬is added.
Take a look at the following examples. Pay attention to the first letter of the ‫ فعل‬as well as the last ‫حركة‬
to figure out the inside pronoun.
َّ َّ ْ َ َ ْ َ ْ َ ْ ْ َّ َ ْ َ
‫ضنا أو تلعودن ِِف مِلتِنا‬ِ ‫نلخ ِرجنكم مِن أر‬
We will definitely expel you all from our land or you all will definitely come back to our religion.
94 | P a g e
Notice the ‫ حركة‬before the ‫نون التوكيد‬. Notice how it is a ‫ فتحة‬on ‫( لنخرجن‬meaning the original was a ‫ )ضمة‬and a ‫ ضمة‬on ‫لتعودن‬
(meaning the original was a ‫)واو‬.
ْ ْ َ ْ َّ َ ‫َ َ ل‬
‫تلنبِئنهم بِأم ِرهِم هذا‬
You will most definitely inform them of this matter of theirs
َّ َ
‫فعل انليه الم ؤ ك د‬
The ‫ نهي‬can be emphasized to convey the meaning “don’t you dare…” For the second person, it will
translate as “don’t you dare”, and for third person, it will be translated as “X should not at all”.
The ‫ فعل‬is constructed the same way as the ‫ مضارع‬and a ‫ ال‬is added before it.
Take a look at the chart below.
َّ ُ ُ ْ َ ِّ َْ َّ َ ُ ْ َ
‫َصن‬ ‫أنتم ال تن‬ ‫أنتما ال تن َُصان‬ ‫َصن‬ َ
‫أنت ال تن‬
ِّ ْ ُ ْ َ ِّ َْ َّ ُ ْ َ
‫َصنان‬ ‫أنت ال تن‬ ‫أنتما ال تن َُصان‬ ‫َصن‬ ِ ‫أنت ال تن‬ ِ
َ ْ َ َ َ َّ َ َ ْ َ
‫اهلل اغفال ع َّما َيع َمل الظال ِم ْون‬ ‫وال َتسب‬
Don’t you dare think that Allah is unaware of the wrongdoers.
‫ح‬ َ ‫فَ َال َتغ َّرنَّكم ح‬

‫ٱحل َي ٰوة ٱلن َيا‬
The lowest life should not at all deceive you all.
➢ DRILL 6 What is the inside pronoun? Pay attention to the first letter as well as the ‫حركة‬
on the letter before the ‫نون‬.
َّ َ ُ َ ُ ُ َ
‫ أل ك ِف َر ن‬.5 ‫ يل َق ْو ل َّن‬.1
ُ َُ َ ََْ
‫ ل ت ْس ئَل َّن‬.6 ‫ْن ع َّن‬ ِ ‫ نل‬.2
َّ َ ‫ َيل ُبَ ِّط‬.7
‫ئ‬ ‫ن‬َّ ُ ِّ‫ َتل ُب َي‬.3
َ ْ َُ َ َُ
‫خ ل َّن‬ ِ ‫ نل د‬.8 ‫ ال ت ق ْو ل َّن‬.4
95 | P a g e
7.8 DISTINGUISHING B ETWEEN ‫ أسماء‬AND ‫أفعال‬
We have completed basics of ‫ أسماء‬and ‫أفعال‬, so now we can distinguish between an ‫ اسم‬and a ‫ فعل‬just by
looking at the word, regardless of whether we know the definition or not. Use the following tips to help
you distinguish between the two.
‫االسم‬ ‫الفعل‬
An ‫ اسم‬can take ‫ تنوين‬or ‫ ال‬or ‫ة‬ A ‫ فعل‬cannot
An ‫ اسم‬rarely ends in a ‫سكون‬ Some forms of the ‫ فعل‬end in a ‫سكون‬
If it ends in ‫ين‬/‫ ون‬and the first letter is something If it ends in ‫ين‬/‫ ون‬and the first letter is a ‫ ي‬or ‫ت‬, it
other than ‫ ي‬or ‫ت‬, it is an ‫اسم‬ is an ‫فعل‬
If comes after a ‫ حرف الجر‬or a ‫ حرف النصب‬or a If it comes after a ‫ حرف ناصبة للمضارع‬or a ‫حرف‬
special ‫ مضاف‬it is an ‫اسم‬ ‫ جازمة‬or ‫ قَد‬or ‫ س‬or ‫ف‬
َ ‫سو‬
َ , it is a ‫فعل‬
➢ DRILL 7 Determine whether the words below are ‫ أسماء‬or ‫أفعال‬.
ْ َََْ َ
‫ْثت‬ ‫ اِ ن ت‬. 5 ‫ ش ِف ي ْع‬.1
ْ ِّ َ ْ َ َ ُ َْ ْ ُ
‫ ب ع د اَّل ك رى‬.6 ‫ْش ْو ن‬ ِ ‫ م س ت ب‬.2
ُ ْ‫ َس يُص ي‬.7 َ َّ
‫ب‬ ِ ‫الس ائ ِل‬ .3
َ ‫ أ َ ْن ي َْت‬.8
‫اج عا‬
ََ ْ َ ْ َ
‫ ق د أ ف ل ح‬.4
ِ
ْ‫ ف قُل ُ ْو ب ه م‬.9 ُ ‫ إ َّن‬.5
َ ْ ‫الم ناف ق‬
‫ي‬
ِِ ِِ ِ
96 | P a g e
SENTENCES
‫اجلملة االسمية‬ ‫اجلملة الفعلية‬
‫مبتدأ‬ ‫خْب‬ ‫متعلق باخلْب‬ ‫فعل‬ ‫فاعل‬ ‫مفعول‬

* * *
before is after is after is action doer detail
who/what - ‫به‬
Can be: Can be: Can be: ‫ماض‬
-a single word in -a ‫جار وَمرور‬
inside ‫فاعل‬ when/where - ‫فيه‬
-a single word in
the past tense
‫رفع‬ ‫رفع‬ why - ‫َل‬
OR check endings! pronoun
-a fragment -a special ‫مضاف‬
-a fragment how - ‫حال‬
-almost always -a full sentence ‫مضارع‬
insesity - ‫مطلق‬
proper!
outside ‫فاعل‬
the present tense
‫ جار وَمرور‬- ‫متعلق‬
-after the ‫فعل‬
check endings AND
beginnings! ‫بالفعل‬
-in ‫ رفع‬status
‫نه‬/‫أمر‬
imperative action
-‫ فعل‬is ‫ه‬/‫هو‬
*Essential part of every sentence!
97 | P a g e
َ َ َ َ َ َْ ٌ ٌ َ َ َُ ٌ ْ ََ
‫عال ٌم – عال ُم ْون‬ ‫أن َع ٌام‬ ‫ِإله – ِآل َهة‬ ‫شك ُاء‬ – ‫شيك‬ ِ
world/creation cattle َ god/diety partner/associate
ٌ َ ٌ َ ٌ ُ َ ٌ ٌ
(f) ‫ َو ِاحدة‬/‫واحد‬ِ (f)‫ ِإ ْحدى‬/ ‫أ َحد‬ (‫َو ْحد)ه‬ ‫َم َّرة – َم َّرات‬
one one alone times (occurrences)
3-Letter
َ ُ َ َ
to gather (s.t) ‫َج َم َع َي ْج َم ُع َج ْم ًعا‬ to know ‫ع َرف َي ْع ِرف َم ْع ِرفة‬
ْ َ َ ً َ ُ َ ََ
to lift/raise ‫َرف َع َي ْرف ُع َرف ًعا‬ to perish/be destroyed ‫هلك َي ْه ِلك هالكا‬
َْ ُ ُ ْ َ َ َ َ ً ُ َ
to kill ‫قتل يقتل قتل‬ to find ‫َو َجد َي ِجد ُو ُج ْودا‬
ْ َ َ ًَّ ُ َ
to prevent/protect ‫َمن َع َي ْمن ُع َمن ًعا‬ to assume ‫ظ َّن َيظ ُّن ظنا‬
ًْ ُ َُْ َ َ َ
to provide for/sustain ‫رزق يرزق رزقا‬ to make ‫َج َع َل َي ْج َع ُل َج ْعل‬
ً َ ْ ُِ ُ َ ْ َ َ َ َ ُ َ َ
to presume/deem ‫ح ِسب يحسب حسبانا‬ to worship ‫ع َبد َي ْع ُبد ِعبادة‬
FAMILY II
ْ َ ِّ َ َّ َ ً َ
to speak/talk to )‫كل َم ُيكل ُم تك ِل ْي ًما (ـه‬ to make (s/t) clear ‫ت ْب ِي ْينا‬ ‫ي‬ُ ِ ‫ُي َب‬ ‫ي‬َ َّ ‫َب‬
َْ َ َ َ ِ َّ
to change s/t ‫غ َّ َب ُيغ ِ ُب تغ ِي ْ ًبا‬ to change/exchange ‫ت ْب ِد ْيل‬ ‫ُي َبد ُل‬ ‫َبد َل‬
َ ِ َّ َ
to torture ‫عذ َب ُي َعذ ُب ت ْع ِذ ْي ًبا‬
FAMILY IV
ً ‫ُي ْخر ُج إ ْخ َر‬ َْ ْ َ ‫َأ ْع َج‬
to make leave/bring forth ‫اجا‬ ‫َأخ َر َج‬ to impress ‫ب ُي ْع ِج ُب ِإع َج ًابا‬
ْ ِ ِ ْ ْ ً َْ ُ َ ََْ
to feed ‫ُيط ِع ُم ِإط َع ًاما‬ ‫َأط َع َم‬ to destroy ‫أ َهلك ُي ْه ِلك ِإهل كا‬
َ ْ ْ َ ْ ْ ْ ْ
to make enter ‫ُيد ِخ ُل ِإدخال‬ ‫أدخ َل‬ to honor ‫أ ك َر َم ُيك ِر ُم ِإك َر ًاما‬
FAMILY V
ً َ ُ َّ َ َ َ َ َّ َ َ َ َ ِّ َ َ َّ َ َ
to become clear ‫ي ت َب ُّينا‬‫تبي يتب‬ to think/contemplate )‫ ِف‬/‫تفك َر َيتفك ُر تفك ًرا (عن‬
FAMILY VIII
ً ْ ُ َ ْ َ َ ََ ْ ً َ ِ ُ َّ َ َ َّ
to differ )‫(ف‬
ِ ‫ِاختلف يخت ِلف ِاخ ِتالفا‬ to take s/t as s/t else ‫ِاتخذ َيت ِخذ ِاتخاذا‬
99 | P a g e
ُْ ْ
‫ فِعل َمعل ْوم‬active verb, doer is known
َْ ْ
‫ فِعل َم ُه ْول‬passive verb, doer is unknown
َ َ
‫ نائِب الفا ِعل‬the “done to”, the one affected by a passive ‫فعل‬
ْ
‫الزم‬
ِ ‫ فِعل‬an intransitive verb (a ‫ فعل‬that cannot take a ‫)مفعول به‬
ْ
‫ فِعل ُمتَ َعد‬a transitive verb (a ‫ فعل‬that can take a ‫)مفعول به‬
َْْ ُ ْ َ ََُ
‫ي‬
ِ ‫ متعد لِمفعول‬a ‫ فعل‬that takes two ‫مفعول به‬
100 | P a g e
‫أفعال متعدية لمفعولي‬
ْ َ ِّ ُ َّ
to teach ‫ َعل َم ي َعل ُم تع ِليْ ًما‬.1
َ ۡ ُ َّ
٤ ‫َعل َمه ٱل َب َيان‬
He taught him language
ً َ ْ َ ََ
to protect ‫ِق ِوقايَة‬
ِ ‫ وَق ي‬.2
ۡ َ َ َّ ََ ُ َّ ُ ُ َ َ َ
١١ … ‫ش ذ ِلك ٱل َي ۡو ِم‬ ‫فوقىهم ٱّلل‬
So Allah protected them from the evil of that day…
ً َ ْ ِّ َ ُ َّ َ
to give s/o their full share of s/t ‫ِف ت ْو ِفيَة‬ ‫ وَّف يو‬.3
ُ َ َ ُ َّ َ َ ُ َ َ َّ َ َ َ َ
٣٩ … ‫ ووجد ٱّلل ِعندهۥفوفىه ِحسابهۥ‬...
And he found Allah at it, so He gave to him in full his reckoning
ًْ ُ َْ َ
to make ‫ َج َعل ْي َعل َجعال‬.4
َ َّ ً َ َ َ
٥٨ … ‫ف َج َعل ُه ۡم ُجذ ذا ِإل ك ِب ٗبا‬
So he made them all into fragments, except for the biggest of them
ً َ ِّ ُ َ َ َ َّ
to take (s/o as s/t) ‫ ِاَّتذ يتَّ ِخذ اَِّتاذا‬.5
ُ ُ َّ َ ّٞ ُ ُ َ َ َّ َّ
٦ … ‫ِإن ٱلش ۡيطـ َن لك ۡم َعدو فٱت ِخذو ُه َعد ًّوا‬
No doubt, Shaytan is especially for you all an enemy so take him as an enemy.
ًَُْ َ َ ََ
to see ‫ رأى يرى رؤية‬.6
ُۖ ۡ َ ٓ َ َ َ َ َ َ ٗ َ َ َ ۡ َّ َ َ َّ َ َ
٧٨ … ‫ال هـذا َر ِ ِب هـذا أ ك َ ُب‬ ‫فلما رءا ٱلشمس ب ِازغة ق‬
And when he saw the sun rising, he said “This is my master, this is bigger.”
ًّ َ َُ َ
to assume ‫ ظ َّن يظن ظنا‬.7
َ ُ ُّ ُ َ َ ِ
٣٧ … ‫… َو ِإ ِب ألظنهۥكـ ِذ ٗبا‬
Certainly, I definitely assume him to be a liar.
ً ُ ُ َ َْ َ َ
to consider, to deem ‫ح ْسبَانا‬ ‫ ح ِسب َيسب‬.8
َ َ
ۡ َ َ ٗ ُ ُۡ ُ ۡ َ َ َ
٤٤ … ‫… فل َّما َرأته َح ِس َبته ل َّجة َوكشفت َعن َساق ۡي َها‬
So when she saw it, she thought it a body of water and uncovered her
calves.
ً َ َ َ َ
to find ‫ْي ُد ُو ُج ْودا‬
ِ ‫ وجد‬.9
ُ َۡ َّ
٤٤ … ‫… ِإنا َو َجدنـه َص ِاب ٗرا‬
Indeed, We found him patient.
ً َ َُْ َ ََ
to leave ‫ْت ُك ت ْراك‬ ‫ ترك ي‬.10
ُۖ ٗ ۡ َ ُ َ َ َ َ ّٞ َ ُ َ َ َ َ
٢٦٤ … ‫…فأصابهۥ و ِابل فبكهۥ صلدا‬
And it is hit by a downpour then it leaves it bare
101 | P a g e
ً‫ أَ ْع َطى ُي ْعط ْي إ ْع َطاء‬.11
to give ِ ِ
َ َ ۡ َ َ َ َ ٓ َّ
١ ‫ِإنا أ ۡعط ۡينـك ٱلك ۡوث َر‬
Certainly We gave you Al-Kawthar.
ً ‫ َج َزى َْيْز ْي َج َز‬.12
‫اء‬
to reward, compensate
َ ُ َ ِ
َ ُ ْ ُ َ َّ
٣٥ ‫… َو َي ۡج ِز َي ـ ُه ۡم أ ۡج َرهم ِبأ ۡح َس ِن ٱل ِذي كانوا َي ۡع َملون‬
[And to] reward them their due with the best of what they َ ً َ َ usedْ َ to َ do
ً ْ ْ ُ َ ْ
ْ ِ ‫أسق يس‬/‫ِق ِسقاية‬ ْ ِ ‫ َسق يس‬.13
to give drink ‫إسقاء‬ ِ ‫ِق‬
٢١ ‫ورا‬ ً ‫ش ٗابا َط ُه‬ َ ََ ‫… َو َس َقى ُه ۡم َرُّب ـ ُه ۡم‬
And their Master gave them a pure drink
ً َ ْ ُ ْ ََ َْ
to make s/o enter s/t ‫ أدخل يُد ِخل إِدخاال‬.14
َۡ ۡ َ َ َّ َ ۡ ۡ َ ۡ ُ ۡ َ ۡ ُ ِّ
٥…‫ي َوٱل ُمؤ ِمنـ ِت َجنـ ٖت ت ۡج ِري ِمن ت ۡح ِت َها ٱألن َهـ ُر‬ ‫ليد ِخل ٱلمؤ ِم ِن‬
To make the believing men and believing women enter gardens from
under which rivers flow
َ َ
to exchange/change ‫ بَ َّدل يبَ لدِل تبْدِيْال‬.15
ۡ َ َ ْ َ ۡ ُ َّ َ َ ۡ ْ ُ َّ َ َ َّ َ َ َ ۡ َ َ
٢٨ ‫ٱّلل كف ٗرا َوأ َحلوا ق ۡو َم ُه ۡم د َار ٱل َب َو ِار‬ ِ ‫ألم تر ِإَل ٱل ِذين بدلوا ِنعمت‬
Do you not see those who exchange the blessing of Allah for disbelief
ً ُ َ
to bless s/o with s/t ‫ َر َزق يَ ْر ُزق ِر ْزقا‬.16
ٗ ًۡ ُۡ ََ َ َ ُ ُ ُ َ َ َ َ
٨٨ … ‫ال َيـق ۡو ِم أ َر َء ۡيت ۡم ِإن كنت َعَل َب ِين ٖة ِمن َّر ِ ِب َو َرزق ِ ِي ِمنه ِرزقا َح َسنا‬ ‫ق‬
He said, “My people! Did you not consider if I am upon clear evidence from
my Master and He blesses me good provisions from it…”
*Will appear in a later chapter. Not required for memorization.
102 | P a g e
CHAPTER 8 – ‫الفعل المبىن للمجهول‬
8.1 INTRODUCTION
The passive ‫فعل‬, or ‫الفعلُالمبنيُللمجهول‬, is a ‫فعل‬-form that is used to express the occurrence of an action
while keeping the doer of that action anonymous. In Arabic, ‫ مجهول‬literally means “unknown” or
“anonymous”. The sentence, “The cake was eaten,” for example, is considered ‫مجهول‬, because the one
who ate the cake is not known. The same goes for the sentence “The cake is eaten”. Both ‫ ماض‬and
‫ مضارع‬can be made ‫مجهول‬.
To determine whether something is passive in either Arabic or English:
1) Find the action

2) Ask yourself “Do I know who performed the action?”
If the answer is no, it is passive. Otherwise, it is active.
➢ DRILL 1 Are the following sentences active (A) or passive (P)?
We were told good things about the The students had breakfast on campus
A/ P A/ P
Arabic program. this morning.
Her parents were going to move from The cupboards are being emptied right
A/ P A/ P
abroad. now.
They were advised against buying real We were on our way to work when he
A/ P A/ P
estate in California. called.
8.2 SENTENCE STRUCTU RE

There are two core parts to a passive ‫جملةُفعلية‬. They are:
1) ‫المبي للمجهول‬
ِ ‫ – الفعل‬the action itself; the passive ‫فعل‬
2) ‫ – نائب الفاعل‬the “done-to”; the thing/person the action was done to
In the sentence “The cake was eaten” the passive ‫ فعل‬is “was eaten”. The done-to or the ‫ نائبُالفاعل‬is “the
cake”.
Know that because the one carrying out the ‫ فعل‬is anonymous, a sentence with a ‫ فعلُمبنيُللمجهول‬can
never have a ‫ فاعل‬in it. Also know that because the done-to is labeled as the ‫نائبُالفاعل‬, passive sentences
do not contain a ‫مفعولُبه‬.
Additional information can appear in the sentence in the form of a ‫ متعلقُبالفعل‬or a ‫ظرف‬.
Let us learn more about the two core components of a ‫ جملةُفعلية‬with a passive.
103 | P a g e
➢ DRILL 2 Underline the ‫ فعل‬once and the ‫ نائب الفاعل‬twice.
1. The fruits and vegetables were washed and dried one-by-one.
2. The emperor’s robes are stitched by hand.
3. The prisoners were released after the treaty was signed.
4. This dictionary was compiled many years ago.
5. My team was never defeated. We were given the gold medal at the tournament last year.
6. His house was robbed while he was away.
‫الفعل الماض المبىن للمجهول‬

Take a look at the following past passive ‫أفعال‬:
َ‫أُ ْعج ْب‬ ُ ‫ُرف ْع‬

‫ت‬
ْ َ ْ ُ
‫أخ ِرجت‬ ُ ِ ُ‫ا ُ ْنت‬
‫َص ْوا‬ َ ُ‫ن‬
‫َص‬
ِ ِ ِ
They (f) were impressed I was lifted She was expelled They were given victory He was helped
Past-passives are characterized by the following:
1) The second to last letter (of the original ‫ )فعل‬takes a ‫كرسة‬

2) Every other ‫ حركة‬before this is changed into a ‫ضمة‬
3) The ‫ حركة‬on the last letter (of the original ‫ )فعل‬REMAINS THE SAME
4) If there is a ‫ سكون‬anywhere on the word, it does not change
***Note: to find the original ‫فعل‬, look at the ‫ هو‬form.
ْ ْ َْ
‫①ا ِْس َتغف َر←② ا ِْس َتغ ِف َر←③ ا ْستغ ِف َر‬
1. Begin with the active form.
2. The second to last letter (‫ )ف‬takes a ‫كرسة‬.
3. Every other ‫ حركة‬before that is changed to a ‫ضمة‬.
***Notice that the last ‫ َ)ر ( حركة‬remains the same.
ْ ْ
***Notice that the ‫غ ( سكون‬/ ‫س‬ ) do not change.
104 | P a g e
َ َ
‫①ق َتل ْوا←② قت ِل ْوا←③ قتِل ْوا‬
1. Begin with the active form
ََ
2. The second to last letter of the original ‫ )ق ت َل ( فعل‬takes a ‫كرسة‬.
3. Every other ‫ حركة‬before that is changed to a ‫ضمة‬.
ُ remains the same.

***Notice that the last ‫)ل ( حركة‬
MEMORIZE the chart below. Notice how the ‫ حراكت‬differ from the ‫ حراكت‬on the non-passive version.

ُ ِ ُ‫ُه ْم ن‬
‫َص ْوا‬
ُ ُ
‫هما ن َِصا‬ َ ِ ُ‫ُه َو ن‬
‫َص‬
masculine
third person
They were helped. Both of them were helped. He was helped.

َ ْ ُ َّ ُ َ ِ ُ‫ُهما ن‬ ْ َ ُ َ
‫َصن‬ ِ ‫هن ن‬ ‫َصتا‬ ‫َصت‬ ِ ‫ِه ن‬
feminine
They were helped. Both of them were helped. She was helped.
ْ ُ‫أَ ْنتُ ْم ن‬
ْ‫َص ُتم‬ ُْ ُ َُْ
‫أنتما ن َِصتما‬
َ ْ ُ َ َْ
‫أنت ن َِصت‬
ِ
masculine
second person
َّ ُ ْ‫أَن‬ ُْ ُ َُْ ُ َْ
All of you were helped. You two were helped. You were helped.
َّ‫َص ُتن‬
ْ ُ‫ت ن‬ ‫أنتما ن َِصتما‬ ْ
‫ت ن َِص ِت‬
ِ ِ ‫أن‬
feminine
All of you were helped. You two were helped. You were helped.
ْ ُ‫ََنْ ُن ن‬ ُ ْ ُ َ
first person
‫َصنا‬ِ ‫أنا ن َِصت‬

both
We were helped. I was helped.
➢ DRILL 3 Write out the passive version of the ‫ أفعال‬below then do the past-passive ‫ نص‬chart for
each ‫ فعل‬orally.
َ ََ ََ َ َ ََْ َ َ َ َّ َ َ َ ََ
‫تق َّبل‬ ‫قاتل‬ ‫أنشأ‬ ‫َب َعث‬ ‫خل َق‬ ‫َعل َم‬ ‫أخذ‬ ‫َج َع‬
105 | P a g e
‫الفعل المضارع المبىن للمجهول‬
Take a look at the following present passive ‫أفعال‬:
َ ‫ُي ْع‬
َ‫ج ْب‬ ُ‫أُ ْر َفع‬ ُ‫َُّتْ َرج‬ َ ُ َ َُْ
‫َص ْون‬ ‫ينت‬ ُ‫ُينْ ََص‬
They (f) are impressed I am lifted She is expelled They are given victory He is helped
Present-passives are characterized by the following:
1) The first letter gets a ‫ضمة‬

2) Every other ‫ حركة‬becomes a ‫فتحة‬
3) The ‫ حركة‬on the last letter (of the original form) REMAINS THE SAME
4) If there is a ‫ سكون‬on the word, it does not change
***Note: to find the original ‫فعل‬, look at the ‫ هو‬form.
َْ ْ ْ
‫①ي َ ْس َتغ ِفر←② ي ْس َتغفِر←③ ي ْس َتغفر‬
1. Begin with the active form.
2. The first letter gets a ‫ضمة‬
3. Every other ‫ حركة‬becomes a ‫فتحة‬
***Notice that the last ‫ ُ)ر ( حركة‬remains the same.
ْ ْ
***Notice that the ‫غ ( سكون‬/ ‫س‬ ) do not change.
َ ْ َ ْ َ ْ
‫① َيقتل ْون←② يقتل ْون←③ يق َتل ْون‬
1. Begin with the active form
ََ
2. The second to last letter of the original ‫ )ق ت َل ( فعل‬takes a ‫كرسة‬.
3. Every other ‫ حركة‬becomes a ‫فتحة‬.
ُ remains the same.

***Notice that the last ‫)ل ( حركة‬
106 | P a g e
MEMORIZE the chart below. Notice how the ‫ حراكت‬differ from the ‫ حراكت‬on the non-passive version.

َ ُ َ ُْ ْ ُ َ ْ‫ُهما ُين‬ ُ َ ْ‫ُه َو ُين‬
‫َص ْون‬ ‫هم ين‬ ‫ان‬
masculine
third person
They are helped. Both of them are helped. He is helped.

َ ْ َ ْ ُ َّ ُ َ ْ‫ُهما ُتن‬ ُ َ ْ‫ه ُتن‬
َ ِ
‫َصن‬ ‫هن ين‬ ‫ان‬
feminine
They are helped. Both of them are helped. She is helped.
َ ْ ُ َ ُْ ْ َُْ َ ُْ َُْ َ ْ‫أَن‬

ُ‫ت ُتنْ ََص‬
‫أنتم تنَصون‬ ‫ان‬
ِ ‫أنتما تنَص‬
masculine
second person
َ ْ َ ْ ُ َّ ُ ْ َ ُْ َُْ َ‫أَنْت ُتنْ ََصيْن‬

All of you are helped. You two are helped. You are helped.
‫أنت تنَصن‬ ‫ان‬ َ

ِ ‫أنتما تنَص‬ ِ ِ
feminine
All of you are helped. You two are helped. You are helped.
ُ َ ْ‫ََنْ ُن ُنن‬
‫َص‬ ُ‫أَنا أُنْ ََص‬
first person
both
We are helped. I am helped.
➢ DRILL 4 Write out the passive version of the ‫ أفعال‬below then do the present-passive ‫ نص‬chart
for each ‫ فعل‬orally.
َ َ ْ َْ ‫ل‬ ْ َْ
‫َي َتق َّبل‬ ‫يقات ِل‬ ‫ينشِئ‬ ‫َيبْ َعث‬ ‫ُيلق‬ ‫ي َعل ِم‬ ‫يَأخذ‬ ‫َي َمع‬
LEARNING TO RECOGNIZE AND TRANSLATE PASSIVES

When looking at a ‫فعل‬, you should be able to determine whether it is past or present and whether it is
active or passive.
َ beginning and a ‫مضارع‬
1) First determine whether it is past or present. Do so by looking for an ‫أيي‬
ending or one of the ‫ ماض‬endings.
2) If it is past-tense, look for the (u-u-i) sound (one or more ‫ ضمة‬and one ‫)كرسة‬.
3) If it present-tense, look for the (u-a-a) sound (one ‫ ضمة‬and one or more ‫)فتحة‬.
4) Find the inside pronoun
107 | P a g e
TRANSLATING
Once you have figured out the tense, the inside pronoun, and whether it is active or passive, you should
be able to translate.
1) Past passive translates as: X was ed.

2) Present passive translates as: X is ed.
➢ DRILL 5 Fill out the table below.
WORD TENSE ACTIVE/PASSIVE PRONOUN TRANSLATION
ُ ُ / ‫ماض‬
‫خ ِلق ْوا‬ ‫ معلوم‬/ ‫َمهول‬
‫مضارع‬
ِّ / ‫ماض‬
‫ُعل ْمنا‬ ‫ معلوم‬/ ‫َمهول‬
‫مضارع‬
ُ ِّ َ ُ / ‫ماض‬
‫نفضل‬ ‫ معلوم‬/ ‫َمهول‬
‫مضارع‬
ُ ُ / ‫ماض‬
‫أ ِم ْرت‬ ‫ معلوم‬/ ‫َمهول‬
‫مضارع‬
َّ َ َ / ‫ماض‬
‫يتَذك ُر‬ ‫ معلوم‬/ ‫َمهول‬
‫مضارع‬
َ ُ / ‫ماض‬
‫ت ْر َج ُع ْون‬ ‫ معلوم‬/ ‫َمهول‬
‫مضارع‬
‫نائب الفاعل‬
Recall that the ‫ نائبُالفاعل‬is the DONE-TO. In the sentence “The cake was eaten,” the word “cake” is the
‫نائبُالفاعل‬. Though the roles differ, the grammatical rules of the ‫ نائب الفاعل‬are exactly the same as the
rules of the ‫فاعل‬. Let us refresh.
There are two types of ‫نائبُالفاعل‬:

َ
1) Inside (‫مستب‬ ‫ – )ضمب‬if the done-to is a pronoun
2) Outside – if the done-to is other than a pronoun
108 | P a g e
When the ‫ نائبُالفاعل‬is outside:
1) It must come AFTER the ‫فعل‬

2) The ‫ فعل‬must be in the ‫ هو‬or ‫ه‬
ِ form
3) It must be ‫مرفوع‬
In the sentence “‫ص ْرنا‬
ِ ‫ ”ن‬for example, the ‫ نائبُالفاعل‬is the inside pronoun ‫نحن‬.
In the sentence “َُ‫ص َرُالم ْسلِم ْون‬
ِ ‫”ن‬, the ‫ نائبُالفاعل‬is “َُ‫”الم ْسلِمون‬. Notice that it is after the ‫فعل‬, which is in the ‫هو‬
form, and it is ‫مرفوع‬.
Let us take a look at a few examples of passive sentences in the Quran.
َ
‫ُض َب َمثل‬
ِ
An example was struck.
ْ َ‫أنْزل‬
‫ت س ْو َرة‬ ِ
A surah was sent down.
‫هم‬
َ
‫ي ْر َزق ْون فِيْ َها‬
They are given provisions in it.
‫هي‬
َ ْ ‫ت ل لِلم َّتق‬
‫ي‬
ْ َّ
‫أعِد‬
ِ
It was prepared for the God-conscious.
FINDING THE ‫ نائب الفاعل‬I N A S E N T E N C E

1) If the ‫ فعل‬is in the ‫ه‬ِ /‫ هو‬form, look for an outside ‫نائب الفاعل‬. If there is one, it will be the first ‫رفع‬
after the ‫فعل‬.
2) If the ‫ فعل‬is not in the ‫ه‬ ِ /‫ هو‬form, it cannot have an outside ‫ – نائب الفاعل‬do not look for one.
3) Translate the ‫ نائب الفاعل‬as the done-to or the receiver of the action whether it is inside or outside.
109 | P a g e
➢ DRILL 6 Underline the ‫ فعل‬once and the ‫ نائب الفاعل‬twice. If you find an inside ‫نائب الفاعل‬, write
the pronoun underneath the ‫فعل‬. Then translate the ayaat using the word bank provided.
َ ‫َش‬
‫فاعة‬
َ َ
‫ق ِبل‬ ‫ِقتال‬ َ َ‫َكت‬
‫ب‬ ‫ُص ْور‬
َ ََ
‫ن فخ‬
intercession to accept fighting to mandate trumpet to blow
ٌ ٌ َ َْ ْ َ ُ َ ُ َ ُ
‫واحدة‬
ِ ‫ن ِفخ ِف الصو ِر نفخة‬ ‫ث َّم ِإيلْ ِه ت ْر َج ُع ْون‬
ٌَ َ ْ َُُْ ُ ُ َ َ ُ
‫فاعة‬ ‫ال يقبل ِمنها ش‬ ‫ب َعليْك ْم ال ِقتال‬‫ك ِت‬
8.3 THE RHETORICAL B ENEFITS OF THE PASSI VE VOICE

Every passive verb has an active alternative. The distinguishing feature of a passive is that the doer is left
unknown. When a speaker chooses not to mention the doer, the focus is shifted to the action or the
object of the action (‫)نائب الفاعل‬. This can be for one of several reasons:
1) WHEN THERE IS NO REASON TO MENTION THE DOER
َ ْ ْ َ‫حي ْوا بأ‬

َ َ‫ِإَوذا ح لييْت ْم ب َتح َّية ف‬
‫ح َس َن َمنها أ ْو رد ْوها‬ ِ ِ ِ ِ
If you are greeted with a greeting, then greet using a better greeting or return it
This command applies regardless of who is sending the greeting. There is no reason to mention the ‫فاعل‬.
َْ َ َ َْ ْ
‫آيات اهلل ِ يكفر بِها أ ْو ي ْس َت ْه َزأ بِها فال تقعد ْوا َم َعه ْم‬
ِ ‫إِذا َس ِمعت ْم‬
If you hear the signs of Allah being disbelieved in or mocked, do not sit with them.
This command applies regardless of who is disbelieving and mocking. There is no reason to mention the ‫فاعل‬.
َ َ َ
َ ‫اخران َيق ْومان َم‬ َّ َ َ َّ َ َ َ َ ْ َ
‫قامهما‬ ِ ِ ‫ئ‬ ‫ف‬ ‫ا‬‫ِم‬ ‫ث‬ِ ‫إ‬ ‫ا‬‫ق‬ ‫ح‬ ‫ِت‬‫س‬ ‫ا‬ ‫ما‬ ‫ه‬‫ن‬ ‫فإِن ع ِث لَع أ‬
If it is discovered that they (2) are guilty, let two others take their place
This command applies regardless of who discovers that they are guilty. There is no reason to mention the ‫فاعل‬.
110 | P a g e
َ َ َْ َ َ َ ْ ْ َ َّ َ َ
2) OUT OF RESPECT FOR ALLAH
َ
‫ي أش أرِيْ َد َب َم ْن ِِف األ ْر ِض أم أراد ب ِ ِه ْم َربه ْم َرشدا‬ ِ‫وأنا ال ندر‬
We do not know if evil is intended for those on earth, or if their Master intends guidance
for them.
Notice that when evil is mentioned, the passive is used. When guidance is mentioned, the active is used and the doer
(Allah) is mentioned. It is understood that the doer is the same in both cases. Nevertheless, the jinn who say this only
associate Allah’s name with good out of respect.
3) EXPANDING THE SCOPE OF THE ACTION

ْ
ِ ‫لعِن ْوا ِِف النيا واآلخ ِْرة‬
They were cursed in this world and the next
Specifying the ‫ فاعل‬restricts it to that one ‫فاعل‬. Not specifying the ‫ فاعل‬leaves it open and unlimited. Compare the ayah
َ
ُ ‫)ل َع َن ُه ْم‬,
above to the ayah ( ‫للا‬ where the doer is specified.
8.4 TRANSITIVITY
You may have noticed that the role of the ‫( نائبُالفاعل‬the done-to) in a passive sentence is similar to the
role of the ‫ مفعولُبه‬in a non-passive sentence. Though the labels and statuses are different, they both
play the role of the thing/person that is affected by the ‫فعل‬.
Consider the following examples.
- In the sentence “Hamza ate the cookie,” the word “cookie” is the thing that is affected by the
action. This sentence is not passive, so “cookie” is the ‫مفعول به‬.
- In the sentence “The cookie was eaten,” the word “cookie” is the thing that is affected by the
action. This sentence is passive, so “cookie” is the ‫نائب الفاعل‬.
Again, the labels differ, but the roles that a ‫ مفعولُبه‬and a ‫ نائبُالفاعل‬play are very similar. Knowing this, it
will not surprise you to know that when converting a non-passive sentence to a passive sentence, what
was the ‫ مفعولُبه‬in the non-passive version becomes the ‫ نائبُالفاعل‬in the passive version.
Now recall that every passive sentence must have a ‫نائبُالفاعل‬.
*T HIS MEANS THAT IF A SENTENCE DOES NOT HAVE A ‫مفعولُبه‬, IT CANNOT BE MADE PASSIVE WHILE RETAINING
THE SAME MEANING .*
This is because if there is no ‫مفعولُبه‬, there is nothing that can be turned into a ‫نائبُالفاعل‬.
Recall that the ‫ مفعولُبه‬is optional. A sentence made up of a ‫ فعل‬and ‫ فاعل‬is considered a complete
sentence. In some cases, a sentence lacks a ‫ مفعولُبه‬simply because the speaker chooses not to mention
it. In other cases, a sentence lacks a ‫ مفعولُبه‬because the ‫ فعل‬in the sentence cannot take a ‫مفعولُبه‬. A ‫فعل‬
that cannot take a ‫ مفعولُبه‬is called a ‫ٌُالز ٌُم‬
ِ ‫ ِف ْعل‬.
111 | P a g e
‫الفعل الالزم‬
A ‫ فعلُالزم‬is a ‫ فعل‬that CANNOT take a ‫مفعولُبه‬. This is because the nature of the action is such that it only
affects the ‫ فاعل‬and cannot affect anything external. “To sleep” would be an example of a ‫فعلُالزم‬. This is
because the action of sleeping only affects the ‫فاعل‬. It is not possible to sleep someone else or to sleep
something.
A good way to test whether a ‫ فعل‬is ‫ الزم‬is to use “something” or “someone” as a placeholder for your
‫مفعولُبه‬. If the sentence does not make sense after doing so, or if it requires some sort of preposition or
‫ حرف‬in order to make it make sense, the ‫ فعل‬is ‫الزم‬.
Let us put the ‫“ فعل‬to read” to the test.
I read something.
This sentence makes sense. The ‫ فعل‬is not ‫الزم‬.
Let us put the ‫“ فعل‬to fall” to the test.
I fell something.
I fell someone.
Neither of these sentences make sense. The ‫ فعل‬is ‫الزم‬.
Let us put the ‫“ فعل‬to laugh” to the test.
I laughed something.
I laughed someone.
Neither of these sentences make sense. The ‫ فعل‬is ‫الزم‬.
Since the two actions “to fall” and “to laugh” require a preposition, then they are ‫الزم‬, and therefore
cannot be made passive.
‫الفعل المتعدي‬
A ُ‫ ِف ْعلٌُمت َ َعد‬is the opposite of a ‫فعلُالزم‬. It is a ‫ فعل‬that CAN take a ‫مفعولُبه‬. This is because the nature of the
action is such that it affects something else or someone else. To figure out if a ‫ فعل‬is ‫متعد‬, use the same
test mentioned previously.
This type of ‫ فعل‬CAN be made passive.
112 | P a g e
➢ DRILL 7 ‫ الزم‬or ‫?متعد‬
‫الزم‬ ‫متعد‬ to cry ‫الزم‬ ‫متعد‬ to eat ‫الزم‬ ‫متعد‬ to carry
‫الزم‬ ‫متعد‬ to read ‫الزم‬ ‫متعد‬ to write ‫الزم‬ ‫متعد‬ to worry
‫الزم‬ ‫متعد‬ to despair ‫الزم‬ ‫متعد‬ to wash ‫الزم‬ ‫متعد‬ to fold
‫الفعل المتعدي لمفعولي‬

A ‫ فعلُمتعدُلمفعولين‬is a ‫ فعل‬that can take two ‫مفعولُبه‬. It is relevant to our study of passives because a
passive sentence can only have one ‫نائبُالفاعل‬. When a ‫ فعلُمتعدُعلىُمفعولين‬appears in the passive form, it
takes one ‫ نائبُالفاعل‬and one ‫مفعولُبه‬. This is the ONLY circumstance in which you will find a ‫ مفعولُبه‬in a
passive sentence. Take a look at the following example.
‫نحن‬
ْ َّ َ ْ َ ْ ‫ل‬
‫ي‬
ِ ‫عل ِمنا من ِطق الط‬
We were taught the speech of birds.
Notice that there is one ‫ نحن( نائب الفاعل‬inside ‫ )علمنا‬and one ‫)منطق الطب ( مفعول به‬.
SUMMARY OF PASSIVES
A passive verb: the doer of the action is unknown.
To recognize a passive ‫فعل‬:
Check the tense first!
if it is past tense, look for the following sounds… if it has those sounds, then translate it as…
‫ُـ ُـ ِـ‬ X was _________ed
if it is present tense, look for the following sounds… if it has those sounds, then translate it as…
‫ُـ َـ َـ‬ X is ed
113 | P a g e
ْ
‫الزم‬
ِ ‫فِعل‬ an intransitive verb, cannot take a ‫ مفعول به‬cannot be made passive
ْ
‫فِعل ُمتَ َعد‬ a transitive verb, can take a ‫مفعول به‬ can be made passive
َْْ ُ ْ َ ََُ can be made passive AND

‫ي‬
ِ ‫متعد لِمفعول‬ a ‫ فعل‬that takes two ‫مفعول به‬
have both a ‫ نائب الفاعل‬and a ‫مفعول به‬
114 | P a g e
َ َ َ َ َ َ ْ ُ َ َ ُ ُ َ
‫كذلِك‬/‫هكذا‬ (f) ‫أخ َرى‬/‫آخ ُر‬ ‫آخ ٌر‬
ِ (f) ‫أ ْول‬/‫أ َّول‬
like that/in that way other last first
ُ ْ ‫ََمْنُ ْو ٌن – ََمَان‬ َ ُْْ ُ
ْ‫ذ ُوو‬/ ُ‫ن – أَ ْغنِيَاء‬
ٌّ ‫َغ‬ ُ‫ي – ُف َق َراء‬
ٌ ْ ‫فَق‬
‫ي‬ ِ ‫أولو‬ ِ ِ
insane, lunatic people of… rich poor
ٌ ‫َج َو‬ َ ً َ َُْ ٌ‫َذ َك ٌر – ُذ ُك ْور‬
‫اب‬ ‫بَ َص – أبْصار‬ ‫أنَث – إِناثا‬
answer eyesight female male
3-LETTER
ً ُ ُ َْ َ ََ ً ُ ُ ُ ُ َْ َ َ َ
to come down ‫ْنل ن ُز ْوال‬ ِ ‫نزل ي‬ to prostrate )‫ج ْودا (لـ‬ ‫سجد يسجد س‬
ً ْ ُ ُ َْ ََ َ ًََْ ُ َ َْ َ َ
to forgive (‫غفر يغ ِفر غفرانا )لـ‬ to have/show mercy ‫ر ِحم يرحم رَحة‬
ً ُ ْ َ َْ ََْ ََ
to dislike ‫ك ِر َه يَك َر ُه ك ْرها‬ to benefit ‫نف َع ينف ُع نف ًعا‬
ً ُ َْ َ ُ َْ َ
to be sad ‫َح ِزن َي َزن َح َزنا‬ to sit ‫َجل َس ْي ِل ُس ُجل ْو ًسا‬
ُ ُ َ ً َ ْ ُ ُ َ َْ َ َ
to fall ‫َسق َط ي َ ْسق ُط ُسق ْو ًطا‬ to lose/suffer a loss ‫رسانا‬ ‫خ ِرس َيرس خ‬
ْ ُ ُ ْ َ َ َ َْ َ
to thank/be grateful ‫شك َر يَشك ُر شك ًرا‬ to be happy ‫ف ِر َح يف َر ُح ف َر ًحا‬
ًْ ُ َ َ َ ً َ ُ َْ َََ
to own ‫َملك ي ْم ِلك ُملَك‬ to carry ‫َحل َي ِمل َحْال‬
FAMILY II
ً َْ ُ ُ َ ْ ْ َ ِّ َ ُ َّ َ
to burn s/t ‫َح َّرق َيَ ِّرق َت ِريْقا‬ to bring forward ‫قد َم يقد ُم تق ِدي ًما‬
FAMILY IV
ً ْ ُ ُْ َ ََْ ً ْ ُْ َ َ َْ
to send down ‫ْنل إِن َزاال‬
ِ ‫أنزل ي‬ to associate partners ‫ْش ُك إَِشااك‬
ِ ‫أَشك ي‬
FAMILY VIII
ْ ُ ََْ َ َ َ ْ
ً ‫خت َص‬ ً َ‫ا َّتبَ َع يَتَّب ُع ا ِّتب‬
to dispute ‫اما‬ ِ ‫ِاختصم َيت ِصم ِا‬ to follow ‫ااع‬ ِ ِ ِ
115 | P a g e
‫انلا ِفيَة‬
َّ ‫ال‬ the ‫ ال‬of negation (comes before an ‫ اسم‬or a ‫فعل‬, does not change its status)
ْ ْ
‫انلا ِفيَة لِل ِجن ِس‬
َّ ‫ ال‬the ‫ ال‬of categorical negation (only comes before an ‫اسم‬, makes it light and ‫)نصب‬
‫انلا ِهيَة‬
َّ ‫ال‬ the ‫ ال‬of forbidding (makes a ‫ فعل مضارع‬lightest)
‫ حروف‬that are added onto a part of the sentence for emphasis, but it does not
‫الزائِ َدة‬
َّ ‫اِل ُ ُر ْوف‬
change its role in the sentence
116 | P a g e
CHAPTER 9 - NEGATION
9.1 INTRODUCTION
Thus far, we have learned how to construct and recognize positive sentences, both ‫ فعلية‬and ‫اسمية‬. Now
we will learn how to negate them. There are tools of negation that are UNIQUE to ‫الجملةُالفعلية‬. There are
tools of negation that are UNIQUE to ‫الجملةُاالسمية‬. And there are tool of negation that are SHARED by
both.
9.2 NEGATING ‫اجلملة الفعلية‬

The tools of negation for ‫ الجملةُالفعلية‬vary based on the tense of the sentence. It is possible to negate
past, present, and future sentences.
P A S T -T E N S E N E G A T I O N
There are two ways to negate the past-tense. They are:
َ
1) ‫ مضارع‬+ ‫ل ْم‬
2) ‫ ماض‬+ ‫ما‬
Recall that ‫ لَ ُْم‬can only occur with the ‫مضارع‬, but it always pushes the meaning to the past. It also causes
the ‫ فعل‬to be ‫مجزوم‬.
This ‫ ما‬is called ‫ماُالنافية‬. It does not affect the ‫ فعل‬grammatically in any way. In terms of meaning, it differs
from ‫ لَ ُْم‬in that it is used for refutation or in a context of debate.
ْ
‫اج ِدي َن‬ َّ ْ ْ ُ َ ْ َ
ِ ‫لم يكن ِمن الس‬
He was not among those who prostrated.
The ayah above is speaking about Iblis. There is no debate as to whether he prostrated or not, so ‫ لم‬is used rather than ‫ما‬.
َ ْ ‫الم ْْشك‬
‫ي‬
َ
ُ ‫اكن م ْن‬ ‫ما‬
ِِ ِ
No, he was not among those who committed shirk.
The ayah above is speaking about Ibrahim (AS). There were debates amongst the people of the book as to his beliefs, so ‫ما‬
is used for refutation.
P R E S E N T -T E N S E N E G A T I O N
There are two ways to negate the present-tense. They are:
1) ‫ مضارع‬+ ‫ال‬
2) ‫ مضارع‬+ ‫ما‬
The ‫ ال‬that is used to negate the ‫ مضارع‬is called ‫ الُالنافية‬and does not affect the ‫ فعل‬in any way. Do not
confuse this with ‫الُالناهية‬, the ‫ ال‬that is used for forbidding.
‫ ماُالنافية‬differs from ‫ الُالنافية‬in that it is used for refutation or in the context of a debate.
117 | P a g e
Since the present and future tense share the ‫ مضارع‬form, this type of negation can sometimes be
translated as future-tense. Context reveals which is intended.
َ ُْ ُْ
‫اآلخ ِر‬
ِ ِ‫لل َوايلَ ْوم‬
ِ ‫ال يؤ ِمنون بِا‬
They do not believe in Allah and the last day.
ْ َ ‫ك ِم ْن‬
‫َشء‬
َ َْ ُ َ َ
‫وما يَضون‬
No, they will not harm you at all.
FUTURE NEGATION
ُْ َ‫ ل‬is the only way to negate explicitly in the future-tense. Recall that it occurs with a ‫ فعلُمضارع‬and that
‫ن‬
it makes it ‫منصوب‬.
‫واحد‬ َ َ َ ْ َ َْ
ِ ‫لن نص ِْب َع طعام‬
We will not endure one type of food.
Note that ‫ لَ َّما‬is also used for negation. It is not associated with a particular tense and translates as “not
yet”. It occurs with the ‫ مضارع‬and makes it ‫مجزوم‬.
ُ ُُ ْ ُ ْ ُ ْ َ َّ َ َ
‫ف قل ِبك ْم‬ِ ‫اإليمان‬
ِ ‫ولما يدخ ِل‬
Faith has not yet entered your hearts.
➢ DRILL 1 Negate the following sentences.
َ َّ‫ي َ ْس َأل ْو َن انل‬

.‫اس‬
َ ْ
. ‫َس ت ق بَل ت ْو بَت ه ْم‬
ْ َ َ َ َ
‫قال ْوا َك َِمة الكف ِر‬ .‫يؤِمِن ْون بِاهللِ وايلَ ْو ِم اآلخ ِِر‬
َ َ ْ َ
.‫َسنؤمِن لك‬ .ِ‫آمن ْوا بِاهللِ وايلَ ْو ِم اآلخِر‬
9.3 NEGATING ‫اجلملة االسمية‬

The two tools for negating a ‫ جملةُاسمية‬are ‫ ما‬and ‫ليس‬. These two tools function in a similar way.
There are four ways to negate a ‫جلمةُاسمية‬. They are:
‫خْب منصوب‬ ‫مبتدأ مرفوع‬ ‫ما‬ )1
‫ خْب َمرور‬+ ‫بـ‬ ‫مبتدأ مرفوع‬ ‫ما‬ )2
‫خْب منصوب‬ ‫مبتدأ مرفوع‬ ‫ليس‬ )3
‫ خْب َمرور‬+ ‫بـ‬ ‫مبتدأ مرفوع‬ ‫ليس‬ )4
118 | P a g e
Notice that they both come before the ‫ مبتدأ‬and do not change its status. When negating using these
tools, one of two things can happen to the ‫خبر‬:
1) It can be made ‫منصوب‬

2) A ‫ باء‬can be attached to it, making it ‫جمرور‬
There are two tools of negation and two ways to treat the ‫ خبر‬for each. This makes four ways total to
negate a ‫جلمةُاسمية‬.
Let us negate the sentence “ُ‫”الرجلُم ْس ِل ٌم‬

َّ all possible ways.
ُ َّ
‫الر ُجل ُم ْس ِل ًما‬ ‫ما‬ )1
ُ َّ
‫الر ُجل بِ ُم ْس ِلم‬ ‫ما‬ )2
ُ َّ َ ْ َ
‫الر ُجل ُم ْس ِل ًما‬ ‫ليس‬ )3
ُ َّ َ ْ َ
‫الر ُجل بِ ُم ْس ِلم‬ ‫ليس‬ )4
These four variations yield similar meanings. Let us go through each variable and see how it differs from
the alternative.
‫ابلاء الزائدة‬
The ‫ ب‬is used for extra emphasis. It is considered ‫زائدة‬, or extra, meaning that its presence does not
change the role of the word in the sentence – it is only there for emphasis. The variations without the ‫باء‬
translate as “not…” while the variations with the ‫ باء‬translate as “not at all…”. Grammatically the ‫ باء‬is
from the ‫حروفُالجر‬, but because it is ‫ زائدة‬IT DOES NOT CREATE A ‫متعلقُبالخبر‬. The ‫ خبر‬with the ‫ باء‬on it is still
considered a ‫خبر‬. This is one of the few cases in which a ‫ جارُومجرور‬in a ‫ جملةُاسمية‬is not considered a
‫متعلقُبالخبر‬.
‫ما‬
‫ ما‬is used for refutation or in the context of debate, while ‫ ليس‬is used for plain negation. One way to
capture this in translation is by using a “no” at the beginning of the sentence.
‫ليس‬
‫ ليس‬is an odd type of ‫فعلُماض‬. This means that it conjugates and can have an inside pronoun. When
negating a sentence that has a pronoun as a ‫مبتدأ‬, the pronoun no longer appears as an independent
pronoun. Rather it appears as a ‫ ضميرُمستتر‬inside of ‫ليس‬. The ‫ما‬, on the other hand, cannot conjugate nor
can it carry a pronoun. It always remains the same.
119 | P a g e
MEMORIZE the ‫ ليس‬chart.
َ َ َ
‫ه ْم ليْس ْوا‬ ‫هما ليْسا‬ ‫ه َو ليْ َس‬
They are not… Both of them are not… He is not…
َ َ ْ ‫ه لَيْ َس‬
‫ه َّن ل ْس َن‬ ‫هما ليْ َستا‬ ‫ت‬ َِ
َ َْ َ َْ َ ْ ‫َأن‬
They are not… Both of them are not… She is not…
‫أنت ْم ل ْست ْم‬ ‫أنتما ل ْستما‬ َ ‫ت ل َ ْس‬
‫ت‬
َّ ْ ‫َأن‬ َ َْ َ َْ
All of you are not… You two are not… You are not…
َّ‫ت ل َ ْست‬ ْ
‫أنتما لستما‬ ‫ت‬ ْ
ِ ‫ت لس‬ِ ‫أن‬
َ َ
All of you are not… You two are not… You are not…
َ َْ
‫َنن ل ْسنا‬ ‫أنا ل ْست‬
We are not… I am not…
‫ ليس‬is an irregular ‫ – فعل‬notice how the ‫ ي‬drops from ‫ هن‬onwards.
To negate a sentence that has a pronoun as a ‫ مبتدأ‬using ‫ليس‬:
1) Conjugate ‫ ليس‬according to the pronoun

2) Get rid of the pronoun
3) Put the ‫ خب‬in ‫ نصب‬OR attach a ‫ ب‬to it and put it in ‫جر‬
ْ َ ْ َ ً ْ َ ْ َ ْ َ َْ
‫ت بِ ُمؤ ِمن‬‫ لس‬OR ‫ت ُمؤ ِمنا‬‫ت ُمؤ ِم ٌن← لس‬‫أن‬
ْ َ ْ َ ٌ ْ ُ
‫ ل ْس َن بِ ُمؤ ِمنات‬OR ‫ه َّن ُمؤ ِمنات← ل ْس َن ُمؤ ِمنات‬
When constructing or translating, make sure that ‫ ليس‬and the ‫ خبر‬match in number and gender. Notice
that in the examples above, when the ‫ مبتدأ‬is masculine, so is the ‫ خبر‬and vice versa.
Take a look at the examples below. Notice how the different tools of negation are used in the Quran and
notice how this affects the translation.
‫خْب منصوب‬ ‫مبتدأ مرفوع‬ ‫ما‬

ً َ َ ‫ما هذا ب‬
‫ْشا‬
No, this is not a human.
‫ خْب َمرور‬+ ‫بـ‬ ‫مبتدأ مرفوع‬ ‫ما‬

ُ ‫َوما‬
‫الل بِغافِل‬
No, Allah is not at all heedless.
120 | P a g e
‫خْب منصوب‬ ‫مبتدأ مرفوع‬ ‫ليس‬
ً ‫لَي ْ ُس ْوا َس‬
‫واء‬
They are not the same.
‫ خْب َمرور‬+ ‫ب‬ ‫مبتدأ مرفوع‬ ‫ليس‬

َّ َ َ ْ َ
‫ليس بِظالم‬
He is not at all an oppressor.
Also know that if the sentence contains a ‫متعلق باخلب‬, neither ‫ ما‬nor ‫ ليس‬have an effect on the ‫متعلق باخلب‬.
➢ DRILL 2 Negate the following sentences all possible ways.

ٌ ٌ ْ َ
‫اَل ْر ُس َط ِو يْل‬
َّ ‫ه ُم ؤ ِم نَ ة‬ِ
َ ْ ‫أ ُم ُه ِم ْن ِم‬
‫َص‬ ‫اخلاِس يْ َن‬
ُ
‫ه ْم ِم ْن‬
ِ ِ
ABSOLUTE CATEGORICAL NEGATION

Absolute categorical negation is another type of negation that is unique to ‫الجملةُاالسمية‬. It gives the
meaning “there is absolutely no…”. This type of sentence is made up of a ‫ال‬, called ‫س‬ُ ِ ‫الُالنَّافِ َيةُل ِْل ِج ْن‬, followed
by an ‫ اسم‬that is:
a. light
b. ‫منصوب‬
c. followed by a ‫جار وجمرور‬
In terms of meaning, it leaves no room for exception.

121 | P a g e
‫اَليْن‬ َ ْ
ِّ ‫راه ف‬
ِ ‫ال ِإك‬
There is absolutely no compulsion in the religion.
َ َ َ
‫َشيْك َُل‬
ِ ‫ال‬
He has absolutely no partner.
(lit. There is absolutely no partner for Him.)
َ ‫ال َرْي‬
‫ب ِف ْي ِه‬
There is absolutely no doubt in it.
In terms of labeling, the ‫ الُالنافية‬along with the ‫ اسم‬that follows it (‫ )اسمُال‬make up the ‫مبتدأ‬. The ‫جارُومجرور‬
that follows is the ‫متعلقُبالخبر‬.
‫ الُالنافيةُللجنس‬is the third reason to make an ‫ اسم‬light. Recall that the first two reasons were ‫ مضاف‬and
partly-flexible words.
Know that if the ‫ اسم‬that follows is ‫ مرفوع‬and heavy, the ‫ ال‬is not ‫نافيةُللجنس‬. Rather, it is a regular ‫ الُنافية‬and
there is room for exception.
‫ال َبيْ ٌع ِفي ِه‬

There is no bargaining in it.
9.4 SHARED TOOLS OF NEGATION
There are two tools of negation that are shared between ‫ الجملةُالفعلية‬and ‫الجملةُاالسمية‬.
َّ ْ َّ
‫ إ ِ ال‬+ ‫ إ ِ ن‬/ ‫ إ ِ ال‬+ ‫ما‬
This negation template gives the meaning “nothing but”. In the case of ‫الجملةُالفعلية‬, the meaning it gives is
“X did/does nothing but Y”. In the case of ‫الجملةُاالسمية‬, it gives the meaning “X is nothing but Y”. These
tools have no grammatical effect on the parts of the sentence. They are like add-ons. If they are
removed, you will be left with a complete, non-negative ‫ جملةُفعلية‬or ‫جملةُاسمية‬.
ُْ are used for refutation, but ‫ إن‬is more emphatic.

Both ‫ ما‬and ‫إن‬
Take a look at the following examples and notice how each is translated.
ٌ ْ ُ َ ٌ ْ َّ َ ُ ْ
ٌ ْ ‫آن ُمب‬
‫ي‬ ِ ‫ِإن هو ِإل ِذكر وقر‬ JI
It is nothing but a remembrance and a clear Quran
If you remove ‫ إن‬and ‫إال‬, you are left with ‫هو ذكر للعالمي‬, a regular ‫جملة اسمية‬.
ُ ْ ٌ ََ َ َّ ْ ُ ْ َ
‫رس ِمثلنا‬ ‫ما أنتم ِإل ب‬ JI
You all are nothing but humans like us.
َ ‫أنتم‬, a regular ‫جملة اسمية‬.
If you remove ‫ إن‬and ‫إال‬, you are left with ‫برس مثلنا‬
122 | P a g e
َ َّ َ ُ ُ ْ
‫إ ِن َيق ْول ْون ِإل ك ِذ ًبا‬ JF
They utter nothing but lies.
If you remove ‫ إن‬and ‫إال‬, you are left with ‫يقولون كذبا‬, a regular ‫جملة فعلية‬.
َّ ُ َ ُُ ْ
‫ما َيأ كل ْون ِ ِف ُبط ْو ِن ِه ْم ِإل الن َار‬ JF
They eat into their bellies nothing but fire.
If you remove ‫ إن‬and ‫إال‬, you are left with ‫يأكلون ِف بطونهم النار‬, a regular ‫جملة فعلية‬.
Note that these templates can also be used when the sentence structure is irregular. Take a look at the
example below.
ُ ُ َ َّ ْ ُ َّ
ُ ْ ‫المب‬
‫ي‬ َ َ
ِ ‫وما عَل الرسو ِل ِإل البالغ‬
The messenger’s only obligation is clear conveying.
(lit. There is nothing upon the messenger but clear conveying.)
ُ ُ
If you remove ‫ إن‬and ‫إال‬, you are left with ‫المبي‬ ‫عَل الرسول البالغ‬, a ‫ جملة اسمية‬made up of a ‫ متعلق بالخب‬and a ‫مبتدأ مؤخر‬.
➢ DRILL 3 Give the non-negative version of the ayah then translate the negative version.
َْ َ َ َّ َّ
to guess – ‫ُي رص‬، ‫خ َر َص‬ possessed - ‫َم ْس ح وْ ر‬ assumption – ‫ظ لن‬ to follow – ‫ ي َت ب ِع‬، ‫ا ِت بَ َع‬
‫ح ْو ًرا‬ ُ ‫إ ْن ت َت َّب ُع ْو َن إ َّال َر‬

ُ ‫ج ًال َم ْس‬ ْ ُ َ َّ َ ْ
‫ح يات نا اَل ن يا‬ ‫إِن ِه إ ِال‬
ِ ِ ِ
َ ُ ُ ْ َ َّ ْ ُ ْ َّ َّ َ َّ ْ
‫ص ْو ن‬‫إِن ه م إ ِال َي ر‬ ‫إِن ي َت بِ ُع ْو ن إ ِال الظ َّن‬
‫من الزائدة‬
Recall that ‫ زائد‬means “extra” or “additional”. The ‫ حروفُزائدة‬as a whole are ‫ حروف‬that can attach to an
ُ‫ اسم‬or a fragment without changing its role in the sentence, but adds a new shade of meaning. In the
case of ‫منُالزائدة‬, it adds the meaning of NOT A SINGLE or ANY .
➔ Within a ‫َجلة اسمية‬, the ‫ من الزائدة‬will attach itself to a ‫مبتدأ‬.
123 | P a g e
➔ Within a ‫َجلة فعلية‬, the ‫ من الزائدة‬will attach itself to a ‫ فاعل‬or a ‫مفعول به‬.
Not any ‫ من‬that you see can be considered ‫ ;منُالزائدة‬it has to meet the following conditions:
1. Will always come in either a NEGATED SENTENCE or a QUESTIONING SENTENCE

2. The WORD FOLLOWING it will always be COMMON
3. The sentence should still make sense after its removal.
Take a look at the following examples:
‫ما َل ِمن قلم‬ ٌ ‫ما َُل‬

‫قلم‬
He doesn’t have a single pen. He doesn’t have a pen.
ُ ‫ما ف ابليت من‬ ٌ ُ

‫رجل‬ ِ ‫رجل‬ ‫ابليت‬
ِ ‫ما ف‬
There isn’t a single man in the house. There is no man in the house.
َ ٌ
‫الم ْطبَ ِخ من أكل؟‬
َ ‫هل ف‬ ‫الم ْطبَ ِخ أكل؟‬
َ ‫هل ف‬
Is there any food in the kitchen? Is there food in the kitchen?
Notice how the ‫ منُالزائدة‬latched itself onto the ‫مبتدأ‬. It changed its status and gave it an additional shade
of meaning, but it did not change its role in the sentence.
‫ منُالزائدة‬is very easy to spot in a ‫جملةُاسمية‬. If you have a string of ‫ متعلقُبالخبر‬with no ‫ اسم‬in the ‫ رفع‬status,
then you have yourself a ‫منُزائدة‬. Also, it will almost always come in “he has…” or “there is…” sentence
structures.
Take a look at the following examples:

َ ُ ََ َ ُ ََ
‫ما أتاه ْم ِم ْن ن ِذ ْير‬ ‫ما أتاه ْم ن ِذ ْي ٌر‬
Not a single warner came to them. A warner did not come to them.
َ ُ ُ َ ٌَ ُ ُ َ
‫ما ت ْسقط ِم ْن َو َرق ٍة‬ ‫ما ت ْسقط َو َرقة‬
Not a single leaf falls. Not a leaf falls.
َ ِّ ً َ ِّ
‫َو َما ُي َعل َم ِان ِم ْن أ َح ٍد‬ ‫َو َما ُي َعل َم ِان أ َحدا‬
They don’t teach a single person. They don’t teach anyone.
ْ َ ُ ْ َ ُ
‫ال َي ْم ِلك ْون ِم ْن ِقط ِم ْب‬ ‫ال َي ْم ِلك ْون ِقط ِم ْ ًبا‬
124 | P a g e
They don’t have control over a single membrane They don’t have control over a membrane
surrounding a date pit. surrounding a date pit.
This ayah is referring to the gods people associate with Allah and how they cannot control the littlest, most insignificant
thing.
Notice how the ‫ منُالزائدة‬latched itself onto the ‫ فاعل‬in the first two examples and onto the ‫ مفعولُبه‬in the
second two. It changed its status and gave it an additional shade of meaning, but it did not change its
role in the sentence.
Recognizing ‫ منُالزائدة‬and its role in a ‫ جملةُفعلية‬is not as straight forward as recognizing it within a ُ‫جملة‬
‫اسمية‬, but there is a thought process and some clues that can help you out.
If you find as you are translating, the standard meanings of ‫ من‬do not make any sense. You think it
might a ‫منُالزائدة‬. You ask yourself two questions.
1. Is the sentence negated or does it have a question word at the beginning?

2. Is the word that is coming after common?
If both answers are yes, use the following hints to help you find what role it is playing in the
sentence.
✓ If a ‫ فعل‬is ‫الزم‬, the ‫ من الزائدة‬will definitely be the ‫فاعل‬, as it cannot take a ‫مفعول به‬.
✓ If a ‫ فعل‬already has a ‫( مفعول به‬as an attached pronoun or the like), it will most likely be the
‫فاعل‬, as most ‫ أفعال‬do not take more than one ‫مفعول به‬.
✓ If the ‫ فعل‬already has an inside doer (not in ‫ هو‬or ‫)ه‬, then the ‫ من زائدة‬is certainly the ‫مفعول‬
‫به‬.
Once you’ve determined the role, remove the ‫ منُالزائدة‬and see if the sentence still makes sense.
DRILL 4 Determine what role is the ‫ جارُومجرور‬playing in the ayah, then translate.
َ َ َ ُ ْ َ َ َ َ
to reveal – ‫ ي ُ ْو ِح‬، ‫أ ْو ح‬ end - ‫َز وال‬ leaf – ‫َو َر ق ة‬ to fall – ‫س ق ُط‬ ‫ي‬، ‫س ق ط‬
َ ُ َ
‫مفعول به‬ ‫فاعل‬ ‫مبتدأ‬ ‫َم ا ت ْس ق ُط ِم ْن َو َر ق ة‬
ُ َ
‫مفعول به‬ ‫فاعل‬ ‫مبتدأ‬ ‫َم ا لك ْم ِم ْن َز َوال‬
ْ َ َ ُ َُ َ
‫مفعول به‬ ‫فاعل‬ ‫مبتدأ‬ ‫َو ما أ ْس أل ك ْم َع ل يْ ِه ِم ْن أ جر‬
125 | P a g e
SUMMARY OF NEGATION
NEGATION OF ‫اجلملة الفعلية‬

PAST PRESENT FUTURE
Did not Does not Will not/not yet
past + ‫ما‬ normal present + ‫ما‬ present light + ‫لن‬
present lightest + ‫لم‬ normal present + ‫ال‬ ‫ل‬
present lightest + ‫لما‬
NEGATION OF ‫اجلملة االسمية‬
‫متعلق باخلب‬ ‫خب‬ ‫مبتدأ‬

normal ‫ اسم جمرور‬+ ‫ باء الزائدة‬OR ‫اسم منصوب‬ normal ‫ اسم‬in ‫رفع‬ ‫ما‬
adds the meaning of “at all”
-inside pronoun OR
normal ‫ اسم جمرور‬+ ‫ باء الزائدة‬OR ‫اسم منصوب‬ ‫ليس‬
adds the meaning of “at all” -outside ‫ اسم‬in ‫رفع‬
normal x ‫ اسم‬that is light and ‫ال انلافية للجنس نصب‬
OPTIONS FOR ‫ال‬
with ‫ ال‬of Negation ‫ ال‬of Forbidding ‫ ال‬of Should Not

‫فعل‬a normal present+ ‫ال‬ 2nd person lightest + ‫ال‬ 3rd person lightest + ‫ال‬
(‫ )فاعل‬does not (‫)فعل‬. Don’t (‫!)فعل‬ (‫ )فاعل‬should not (‫)فعل‬
with
‫ ال‬of Categorical Negation ‫ ال‬of Negation
an ‫اسم‬ ‫ نصب‬that is light, common, singular and ‫ اسم‬+ ‫ال‬ , common, and singular‫ رفع‬that is heavy, ‫ اسم‬+ ‫ال‬
There is absolutely no… There is no…
126 | P a g e
SHARED TOOLS OF NEGATION
these tools are used both on ‫ َجلة اسمية‬and ‫َجلة فعلية‬
‫من الزائدة‬
-an extra ‫من‬. Does not change the role of the word that comes after it
-it has to meet the following conditions:
1. Will always come in either a NEGATED SENTENCE or a QUESTIONING SENTENCE
2. The WORD FOLLOWING it will always be COMMON
3. The sentence should still make sense after its removal.
-Within a ‫جملة اسمية‬, the ‫ من الزائدة‬will attach itself to a ‫مبتدأ‬.
-Within a ‫جملة فعلية‬, the ‫ من الزائدة‬will attach itself to a ‫ فاعل‬or a ‫مفعول به‬.
‫ إال‬+ ‫إن‬/‫ إال‬+ ‫ما‬

-has the meaning of “nothing but” or “only”.
-they are add-ons, they can be removed and the sentence will make sense
127 | P a g e
ٌ ٌ ‫َع ْظ ٌم – ع َظ‬ ٌ ‫ِل َق‬ ٌ َ

‫بَيِّنَة‬ ‫ام‬ ِ ‫اء‬ ‫أ َجل ُم َس ًّّم‬
clear evidence bones meeting appointed time
ٌْ‫ط‬ ٌ ‫تُ َر‬ ُ‫ي – َم َساك ْي‬
ٌ ْ ‫م ْسك‬ ٌ َ
‫ي‬ ِ ‫اب‬ ِ ِ ِ ‫َزَكة‬
mud dirt poor person purification/charity
ُ‫أَ ْم ٌر – أَ َوا ِمر‬ ٌ‫أَ ْم ٌر – أُ ُم ْور‬ ْ
‫ِدي ٌن‬ ٌ ‫ِص‬
‫اط‬ َ ِ
command matter religion/judgement path
ٌَ َ ٌ‫ب – ُغيُ ْوب‬
ٌ ْ‫َغي‬ ُ ٌ َُ ُ ٌ َ
‫ش َهادة‬ ‫ن ْو ٌر‬ ‫ظالم – ظلمات‬
witness/what is seen unseen light darkness
3-LETTER
ْ ًْ َ ُ َْ ََ َ
to place ‫َو َض َع يَ َض ُع َوض ًعا‬ to understand ‫عقل يع ِقل عقال‬
ًَ َ ْ َ ُ ْ َ
to witness ‫ش ِه َد يَش َه ُد ش َهادة‬ to feel )‫ش َع َر يَش ُع ُر ش ُع ْو ًرا (بِـ‬
ً ُ ُ َْ َ ََ ً ُ َْ َ
to come down ‫ْنل ن ُز ْوال‬
ِ ‫نزل ي‬ to sit/ to lie in wait ‫ق َع َد يق ُع ُد ق ُع ْودا‬
ً ْ ََُْ َََ ْ َ َ
to do )‫فعل يفعل فِعال (بـ‬ to falsely claim ‫َزع َم يَ ْزع ُم َزع ًما‬
ًْ ُ َْ َ َ
to give permission ‫أ ِذن يَأذن إِذنا‬
FAMILY II
َْ ‫َ ل‬ َ َّ َ َْ ‫َ ل‬ َ َّ َ
to prefer ‫ضيْال‬ِ ‫ضل تف‬ِ ‫يف‬ ‫فضل‬ to delay ‫جيْال‬ِ ‫جل تأ‬ ِ ‫أجل يؤ‬
َْ ْ َ ََْ ْ َ ‫َ َّ َ َ ل‬
to start/create ‫ينشِ ئ إِنشاء‬ ‫أنشأ‬ to call out ‫أذن يؤذِن تأذ ِْينا‬
FAMILY III
ً َ َ َُ َ ً َ ُ َُ َ َ َ
to strive ‫جاهد ْيا ِهد ِجهادا وَماهدة‬
FAMILY IV
ً َْ ُْ ََْ ً ْ ُْ ْ َ
to spend ‫أنف َق ين ِف ُق ِإنفاقا‬ to prepare ‫أعتَ َد يع ِت ُد ِإعتادا‬
ً ْ‫أَفْلَ َح ُي ْفل ُح إف‬
‫الحا‬ )‫اضا (عن‬ً ‫أَ ْع َر َض ُي ْعر ُض إ ْع َر‬
to succeed ِ ِ to turn away ِ ِ
FAMILY V
ً َ ُ َّ َ َ َّ َ
to rely )‫ت َوَّك يتَ َوَّك ت َوُّك (لَع‬
FAMILY VIII
ْ َْ َ ‫ا ِْكتَ َس‬
to earn ِ ‫ب يَكت‬
‫سب ا ِكت َِسابا‬
128 | P a g e
ُ ُ َ َ ْ َ َ َ َّ َ
‫اكن يَك ْون‬ ‫أ ْصبَ َح يُص ِب ُح‬ ‫ظل يظل‬
to be… to become… to remain…
ُ َ َ ‫ما َد‬ َْ
‫ال يَ َزال‬/‫ما َزال‬ ‫ام‬ ‫لي َس‬
to still be… as long as… is not…
َ ٌْ
‫ فِعل ناقِ ٌص‬incomplete verbs, needs a ‫ خْب‬to be complete
ٌّ َ‫ ف ْع ٌل ت‬a complete verb, only requires a ‫ فعل‬and ‫فاعل‬

‫ام‬ ِ
CHAPTER 10 – ‫األفعال انلاقصة‬
10.1 INTRODUCTION
‫ األفعالُالناقصة‬are a set of ‫ أفعال‬that are incomplete in meaning. ‫ األفعالُالناقصة‬are also known as ‫كانُوأخواتها‬,
or “‫ كان‬and her sisters”. This is because ‫ كان‬is the most commonly used ‫فعلُناقص‬. Take a look at the list
below. Pay attention to the definitions.
ْ َ َ
1. ‫ يكون‬, ‫اكن‬
To be…
2. ‫ يصبِح‬, ‫أصبح‬
ْ ََ ْ َ To become…
ََ َّ َ
3. ‫ يظل‬, ‫ظل‬
To remain…
َ َ
4. ‫ال يزال‬/‫ما زال‬
To still be…
َ
5. ‫ما دام‬
As long as…
129 | P a g e
َ َْ
6. ‫ليس‬
Is not…
Notice that the ‫ أفعال‬above do not convey a complete thought. For example, were you to hear someone
say “َُ‫ ”كان‬or “He was…” you would be left with the questions “What/who was he?” Compare this to a
normal ‫فعل‬, like “ُ‫ ”أ َ َك َل‬or “He ate”. This is a complete sentence as it conveys a complete thought.
Because these ‫ أفعال‬are incomplete in meaning, they do not operate like a normal ‫فعل‬. In fact, a sentence
that contains a ‫ فعلُناقص‬is not even considered a ‫جملةُفعلية‬. It is considered a ‫جملةُاسمية‬.
Just as we defined the part before “is” as a ‫ مبتدأ‬and the part after “is” as the ‫ خبر‬or‫ متعلقُبالخبر‬in a regular
‫جملةُاسمية‬, in this new type of ‫ جملةُاسمية‬that we are learning about, the part before “was” (or any of the
other sisters of ‫ )كان‬is the ‫ مبتدأ‬and the part after it is the ‫ خبر‬or‫متعلقُبالخبر‬.
A key difference, however, is that while the “is” in a regular ‫ جملةُاسمية‬is invisible, the “was” (or any of the
other ‫ )أفعالُناقصة‬is not. It is considered part of the ‫مبتدأ‬.
➢ DRILL 1 Underline the ‫ مبتدأ‬once, the ‫ خبر‬twice, and the ‫ متعلقُبالخبر‬three times.
1. They remained in the house. 4. We were surprised.
2. Those gangsters became firefighters. 5. I am still waiting.
3. Our company is still on the fifth floor. 6. He is not a student.
10.2 SENTENCE STRUCT URE

As mentioned previously, a sentence that contains a ‫ فعلُناقص‬is considered a ‫جملةُاسمية‬. On a sentence
level, it contains a ‫ مبتدأ‬and either a ‫ خبر‬or a ‫متعلقُبالخبر‬. Let us take a closer look at each of these
components.
‫المبتدأ‬
RECOGNIZING THE ‫مبتدأ‬ IN ENGLISH SENTENCES

In English, the ‫ مبتدأ‬is simply the “was” (or any other ‫ )فعلُناقص‬together with the word or fragment that
comes before the “was”. In the sentence “The children were hungry” for example, “the children were” is
the ‫مبتدأ‬.
Let us further dissect the ‫مبتدأ‬. It is made up of two components:
1) The ‫فعل ناقص‬, which is simply labeled as a ‫مضارع ناقص‬/‫فعل ماض‬.

2) The word/fragment that comes before it, which is called ‫( اسم اكن‬or any of its sisters)
In the previous example, “the children” is ‫ اسمُكان‬and “were” is the ‫فعلُماضُناقص‬.
➢ DRILL 2 Underline the ‫ فعلُناقص‬once, the ‫ اسم‬twice.
1. They remained in the house. 4. We were surprised.
2. Those gangsters became firefighters. 5. I am still waiting.
3. Our company is still on the fifth floor. 6. He is not a student.
RECOGNIZING THE ‫مبتدأ‬ IN ARABIC SENTENCES

In the type of ‫ جملةُاسمية‬we learned previously, the ‫ مبتدأ‬came in all sorts of shapes and sizes. In this type
of sentence, the ‫ مبتدأ‬is always made up of two components:
1) A ‫فعل ناقص‬
2) An ‫ اسم‬that belongs to that ‫فعل ناقص‬
The rules of the ‫ اسم‬of a ‫ فعلُناقص‬and the rules of a ‫ فاعل‬are EXACTLY THE SAME .
There are two types of ‫اسم‬: OUTSIDE and INSIDE .
a. When the ‫ اسم‬is outside, it must be ‫مرفوع‬, must come after the ‫فعل‬, and the ‫ فعل‬must be in
the ‫ه‬/‫ هو‬form.
b. When the ‫ اسم‬is a pronoun, it appears inside the ‫فعل‬, which simply conjugates according to
that pronoun.
As mentioned previously. When the ‫ اسم‬is a pronoun, it is an inside ‫ اسم‬and the ‫ فعل‬conjugates according
to the pronoun. MEMORIZE the charts for all of the ‫أفعالُناقصة‬.
‫مضارع‬ ‫ماض‬
َ ُ ُ ُ ْ ُ َ ُ ُ ُ ُ ُ ُ ُ َ ُ
‫نان ه ْم يَك ْون ْون‬ ِ ‫هما يكو‬ ‫ه َو يَك ْون‬ ‫ه ْم اكن ْوا‬ ‫هما اكنا‬ ‫ه َو اكن‬
ُ
‫ه َّن يَك َّن‬
ُ
‫نان‬ ْ ُ َ ُ ُ ُ َ َ
‫ه تك ْون‬
ُ
‫ه َّن ك َّن‬
ُ َ ُ ْ َ‫ه اكن‬ َ ِ
ِ ‫هما تكو‬ ِ ‫هما اكنتا‬ ‫ت‬
َ ُ ُ َ َْ ُ َ َُْ ُ ُ َ َ َْ ْ ُ َْ ُْ َْ َ ْ‫ت ُكن‬ َ ْ‫أَن‬
‫نان أنتُ ْم تك ْون ْون‬ ِ
ْ‫ك‬
‫و‬ ‫أنتما ت‬ ‫ت تك ْون‬ ‫أن‬ ‫أنتُ ْم كنتُ ْم‬ ‫أنتُما كنتُما‬ ‫ت‬
ُ َ َّ ُ ْ َ ُ َ َُْ َ ْ ‫ك ْون‬ ُ َ َْ َّ ُ ْ‫ت ُكن‬ َّ ُ ْ‫أَن‬ ُْ َْ ْ ُ َْ
‫ت تك َّن‬ ‫نان أن‬ ِ
ْ‫ك‬
‫و‬ ‫أنتما ت‬ ‫ي‬ ِ ‫تت‬ ِ ‫أن‬ ‫ت‬ ‫أنتُما كنتُما‬ ‫ت‬ِ ‫ت كن‬ ِ ‫أن‬
ُ ُ َ َْ ُ ُ َ َ َّ ُ ْ َ ُ ْ‫أَنا ُكن‬
‫َن ُن نك ْون‬ ‫أنا أك ْون‬ ‫َن ُن كنا‬ ‫ت‬
‫نه‬ ‫أمر‬
‫َ ُ ُ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫َ ُ َ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫َ َ َ ُ‬ ‫َْ ُ ُ‬ ‫ُ َ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫َ َ ُ‬
‫أنتُم ال تك ْون ْوا‬ ‫أنتُما ال تك ْونا‬ ‫نت ال تك ْن‬ ‫أ‬ ‫أنتُم ك ْون ْوا‬ ‫أنتُما ك ْونا‬ ‫نت ك ْن‬ ‫أ‬
‫َ ْ ُ َّ َ ُ‬ ‫َ ُ َ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫َ ُ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫َ ْ ُ َّ ُ‬ ‫ُ َ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫ْ ُ‬ ‫َ‬
‫ت ال تك َّن‬ ‫أن‬ ‫أنتُما ال تك ْونا‬ ‫ت ال تك ْو ِن‬
‫أن ِ‬ ‫ت ك َّن‬ ‫أن‬ ‫أنتُما ك ْونا‬ ‫ت ك ْو ِن‬
‫أن ِ‬
‫ُ ََ َ‬ ‫ُ َ َ َّ‬ ‫ُ ََ‬ ‫ُ َ‬ ‫ُ َ َّ‬ ‫ُ َ َّ‬
‫ه ْم يظل ْون‬ ‫هما يظال ِن‬ ‫ه َو يظل‬ ‫ه ْم ظل ْوا‬ ‫هما ظال‬ ‫ه َو ظل‬
‫ُ َْ َْ‬ ‫ُ َ َ َّ‬ ‫َ ََ‬ ‫ُ َ ْ‬ ‫ُ َ َّ‬ ‫ه َظلَّ ْ‬
‫ه َّن يظلل َن‬ ‫هما تظال ِن‬ ‫ه تظل‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ه َّن ظ ِلل َن‬ ‫هما ظلتا‬ ‫ت‬ ‫ِ َ‬
‫َْ َ َ َ‬ ‫َ ْ َ َ َّ‬ ‫َْ َ َ َ‬ ‫َْ َ ْ‬ ‫َْ َ ْ‬ ‫ت َظللْ َ‬ ‫أَنْ َ‬
‫أنتُ ْم تظل ْون‬ ‫أنتُما تظال ِن‬ ‫ت تظل‬ ‫أن‬ ‫أنتُ ْم ظ ِللتُ ْم‬ ‫أنتُما ظ ِللتُما‬ ‫ت‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َ ْ ُ َّ َ ْ َ ْ‬ ‫َ ْ َ َ َّ‬ ‫أَنْت َت َظلِّ ْ َ‬ ‫ت َظللْ ُ َّ‬ ‫أَنْ ُ َّ‬ ‫َْ َ ْ‬ ‫َْ َ ْ‬
‫ت تظلل َن‬ ‫أن‬ ‫أنتُما تظال ِن‬ ‫ي‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ت‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫أنتُما ظ ِللتُما‬ ‫ت‬‫ت ظ ِلل ِ‬ ‫أن ِ‬
‫َْ ََ‬ ‫َ ََ‬ ‫َْ ُ َ ْ‬ ‫أَنا َظللْ ُ‬
‫َن ُن نظل‬ ‫أنا أظل‬ ‫َنن ظ ِللنا‬ ‫ت‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ُ َ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ُهما ال‪/‬ما يَ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ‬
‫زاالن ه ْم ال‪/‬ما يَزال ْون‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ه َو ال‪/‬ما يَزال‬ ‫ه ْم ما زال ْوا‬ ‫هما ما زاال‬ ‫ه َو ما زال‬
‫ْ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫َ ُ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫ُهما ما َ َ‬ ‫ه ما زالَ ْ‬
‫زاالن ه َّن ال‪/‬ما يَ َزل َن‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ه ال‪/‬ما تزال هما ال‪/‬ما ت‬ ‫ِ َ‬ ‫ه َّن ما ِزل َن‬ ‫زاتلا‬ ‫ت‬ ‫ِ َ‬
‫َ ُ َ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫زال أَ ْنتُ‬ ‫َ ُ‬ ‫أَنْ َ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫ت ما زلْ َ‬ ‫أَنْ َ‬
‫زاالن أنتُ ْم ال‪/‬ما تزال ْون‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ت‬ ‫ما‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫ال‬ ‫ما‬ ‫ت‬ ‫ما‬‫‪/‬‬ ‫ال‬ ‫ت‬ ‫أنتُ ْم ما ِز ُتل ْم‬ ‫أنتُما ما ِز ُتلما‬ ‫ت‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َ َ َْ‬ ‫َ ْ َُّ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ي أَ ْنتُ‬
‫أَنْت ال‪/‬ما تَزال ْ َ‬ ‫ت ما زل ْ ُ َّ‬ ‫أَنْ ُ َّ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َْ‬
‫زاالن أنت ال‪/‬ما تزلن‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ت‬ ‫ما‬ ‫‪/‬‬ ‫ال‬ ‫ما‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ت‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫أنتُما ما ِز ُتلما‬ ‫ت‬‫ِ ِ‬ ‫ل‬ ‫ز‬ ‫ما‬ ‫ت‬‫أن ِ‬
‫َ ُ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ُ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫أَنا ما زلْ ُ‬
‫َن ُن ال‪/‬ما نزال‬ ‫أنا ال‪/‬ما أزال‬ ‫َن ُن ما ِزنلا‬ ‫ت‬ ‫ِ‬
‫ماض‬
‫ُه ْم ما ُ‬
‫دام ْوا‬
‫ُ‬
‫هما ما داما‬ ‫ُه َو ما َ‬
‫دام‬
‫ُه َّن ما ُد َ‬
‫من‬ ‫ُهما ما َ‬
‫دامتا‬ ‫ت‬ ‫دام ْ‬
‫ه َ‬ ‫ِ َ‬
‫ُْ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫ُْ‬ ‫َْ‬ ‫ت ما ُد ْم َ‬ ‫أَنْ َ‬
‫أنتُ ْم ما دمتُ ْم‬ ‫أنتُما ما دمتُما‬ ‫ت‬
‫ت‬ ‫أَنْ ُ َّ‬
‫ت ما ُد ْم ُ َّ‬ ‫ُْ‬ ‫َْ‬
‫أنتُما ما دمتُما‬ ‫ت‬
‫ُْ‬ ‫َْ‬
‫ت ما دم ِ‬ ‫أن ِ‬
‫ُْ‬
‫َن ُن ما دمنا‬
‫َْ‬
‫ت‬ ‫أَنا ما ُد ْم ُ‬
َُ ‫( َلي‬covered previously) only appear in the ‫ماض‬, but translate in the present.
***Notice that ‫ ماُدام‬and ‫ْس‬
The ‫ مضارع‬is not used. Also notice that the charts for ُ‫صبِح‬ْ ‫ي‬،‫ح‬ ْ َ ‫ أ‬are not included. This is because the ‫فعل‬
َُ َ‫صب‬
conjugates in a normal way according to the ‫ نصر‬chart.
➢ DRILL 3 Translate from English to Arabic.
1. She was 6. Be (you all)!
2. We became 7. As long as they
3. They are still 8. You all were
4. He remained 9. Be (you)!
5. They (2) are not 10. You all became
‫ المتعلق باخلب‬/ ‫اخلب‬

The ‫ خبر‬or ‫ متعلقُبالخبر‬is the part after the “was”. The ‫ خبر‬can be a single word or a fragment, as is the
case with the ‫ خبر‬in an ordinary ‫جملةُاسمية‬.
In Arabic, the only difference between the ‫ خبر‬of a ‫ فعلُناقص‬and a normal ‫ خبر‬is that when a sentence
contains a ‫فعلُناقص‬, THE ‫ خبر‬IS ‫منصوب‬. Contrast this with an ordinary ‫ جملةُاسمية‬where the ‫ خبر‬is ‫مرفوع‬.
As for the ‫متعلقُبالخبر‬, the rules are the same. It is made up of either a ‫ جارُومجرور‬or a ‫ظرف‬.
As is the case with an ordinary ‫جملةُاسمية‬, a sentence only requires one of the two to be considered
complete as is the case with a normal ‫جملةُاسمية‬.

ًّ ُ َ
‫َوكان َو ْعد َر ِ ِب َحقا‬
The promise of My master was true.
ُ ُ َ َ َ
ِ ‫وكان ع ْرشه عَل‬
‫الماء‬
His throne was on water.
‫واس ًعا َح ِك ْي ًما‬ ُ َ

ِ ‫وكان للا‬
Allah has always been all-encompassing and all-wise.
Note that when ‫ كان‬is used with the attributes of Allah, it translates as “has always been” rather than “was”.
‫أنتم‬
َ ُُْ
‫كنت ْم أ ْعداء‬
All of you were enemies.
➢ DRILL 4 Underline the ‫ مبتدأ‬once, the ‫ خبر‬twice, and the ‫ متعلقُبالخبر‬three times.
َ َ َ ْ ُ ً ْ َْ َ
‫ت َع ل يْ ِه ق ائ ِ ًم ا‬ ‫ما د م‬ ‫لل َم ف ُع ْو ال‬
ِ ‫َو َكن أ م ُر ا‬
ًّ ُ ْ َّ َ ً ْ ْ ْ ْ ََ
‫ظ ل َوج ُه ه ُم ْس َود ا‬ ‫ص ب َح تُ ْم ب ِنِ ع َم تِ ِه إِ خ َوان ا‬ ‫فأ‬
10.3 ABNORMAL SENTEN CE STRUCTURE ‫نحن‬

The standard order is the ‫ مبتدأ‬followed by the ‫ خبر‬followed by the ‫متعلقُبالخبر‬. Below are the two
scenarios of ‫ تقديم‬and ‫ تأخير‬that occur with ‫ فعلُناقص‬sentences.
It is possible for the‫ متعلقُبالخبر‬toُcome before the ‫خبر‬.

َُ‫ُأنت‬
َ ْ َْ
ًّ‫ت فيْنا َم ْر ُجوا‬
ِ ‫قد كن‬
You had been a source of hope amongst us.
It is also possible for the ‫ متعلقُبالخبر‬to come before the ‫مبتدأ‬. This occurs with but is not limited to
possessive (ُ‫ )لَه‬sentences.
َ َ َ
‫َوَكن َُل ث َم ٌر‬
And he had fruit.
(lit. And for him was fruit.)
ُ َْ َ َ ََْ
ٌ ‫ك ْم ُج‬
‫ناح‬ ‫فليس علي‬
So, there is no blame on you.
Notice that the ‫ جارُومجرور‬comes between the ‫ فعلُناقص‬and its ‫اسم‬. It never comes before the ‫فعل‬.
10.4 COMPLEX SENTENC E STRUCTURE

As is the case with a regular ‫جملةُاسمية‬, it is possible for the ‫ خبر‬to be a full sentence. When it comes to ‫كان‬
sentences, the ‫ خبر‬can only be a ‫جملةُفعلية‬.
When the ‫ فعل‬is ‫ مضارع‬and it comes after ‫كان‬, one of two meaning is conveyed. The first is “was/were -
doing” as in “I was cooking.” The second is “used to x” as in “I used to cook”. Context reveals which of
the two meanings is intended.
As is the case with an ordinary ‫جملةُاسمية‬, the ‫ مبتدأ‬and the ‫ خبر‬match in number and gender, so the
pronoun inside of the ‫ )كان( مبتدأ‬matches with the pronoun inside of the ‫ فعلُمضارع‬inside of the ‫خبر‬. Know
that the status of the ‫ فعل‬remains unchanged. It is always ‫مرفوع‬.
ُ َ َّ ُ َّ
ُ ‫َن ْو ُض َونَلْ َع‬
)‫ب‬ ( ‫إِنما كنا‬
We were only chatting idly and playing.
َّ ‫اكنا (يَأ ْ ُكالن‬

‫هما‬
َ ‫الط‬
)‫عام‬ ِ
The two of them used to eat food.
When the ‫ فعل‬inside of the ‫ خبر‬is ‫ماض‬, it implies that the event occurred long ago. This construction is
not used in modern Arabic and only appears a few times in the Quran. The pronoun inside of ‫كان‬
matches with the pronoun inside of the ‫فعلُماض‬.
ُ ْ َ َ ُ ْ ُ ُ ‫ْ ُ ْأنا‬
‫ت (قلتُه) فقد َع ِل ْمتَه‬ ‫ِإن كن‬
Had I said it long ago, you would have known it.
10.5 TRANSLATING ‫ اكن‬SENTENCES

Though a ‫ كان‬sentence is labelled as a ‫جملةُاسمية‬, it translates as a ‫ جملةُفعلية‬in terms of the order of
translation.
Recall that when translating a ‫جملةُفعلية‬, you translate the ‫فاعل‬, then the ‫فعل‬, then the details.
When translating a sentence with a ‫فعلُناقص‬, you translate the ‫اسم‬, then the ‫فعلُناقص‬, then the ُ‫متعلق‬/‫خبر‬
‫بالخبر‬.
10.6 NEGATING ‫ اكن‬SENTENCES

Though ‫ كان‬sentences are considered ‫جملةُاسمية‬, they are negated the same way a ‫ جملةُفعلية‬is negated
because they begin with a ‫فعل‬.
ُْ ‫ ِيك‬+‫ لَ ْم‬is used.

→ To negate in the past, ‫كان‬+‫ ما‬or ‫ن‬
*Note that it may be easier to use ‫ ما‬for the time being. This is because many of the ‫ أفعالُناقصة‬are irregular and do
not display their ‫ جزم‬in a normal way.
→ To negate in the present ُ‫يَك ْون‬+‫ ال‬or ُ‫يَك ْون‬+‫ ما‬is used.
→ To negate in the future, َُ‫ لَ ْنُيَك ْون‬is used.
Note that all the ‫ حروف‬that can come with a normal ‫ فعل‬can come with a ‫فعلُناقص‬. This includes the
‫ حروفُجازمة‬and ‫ حروفُناصبة‬as well as ‫س‬, ‫ف‬ َ , and ‫قَ ُْد‬.
َُ ‫س ْو‬
➢ DRILL 5 Negate the following sentences.
ً ْ َّ ُ ً ْ ْ
‫ك ن ا إِخ وان ا‬ ‫َس ن ُص بِ ُح إِخ وان ا‬
ُ ً ْ َ َ َْ َ ُ ْ ُ َ
‫طابلَ ة ه نا‬
ِ ‫اكن ت‬ ‫ح َر ٌج‬
َ ‫ك‬ ‫ي كو ن علي‬
NEGATION TEMPLATES
There are two negative sentence templates that convey a unique meaning and are used specifically with
the word ‫كان‬. They are:
ْ َ َ
1) ___‫ما اكن ل ِـ___ أن‬
This template translates as “It is not appropriate for X to do Y”.
X attaches to the ‫ل‬

ُِ . It is usually a pronoun or a proper name.
ُْ َ ‫ أ‬and is a ‫فعلُمضارع‬.
Y comes after the ‫ن‬
ُ ُ ْ ْ َ َ َ
‫ما اكن ل ُه ْم أن يَدخل ْوها‬
It is not appropriate for them to enter it.
َ
2) ____‫ما اكن___ ل ِـ‬
This template translates as “X would not be one to Y”.
X goes in the first blank. It is usually a proper name.
Y goes in the second blank. It is a ‫فعل مضارع‬.
َ ْ ‫الل يلُ َع ِّذ َب ُه ْم َوأَن‬

‫ت ِفيْ ِه ْم‬
َ
ِ ُ ‫ما اكن‬
Allah would not be one to punish them while you are among them.
A S U M M A RY O F ‫اكن وأخ واتها‬

‫وأخواتها‬: look and act like a ‫جملة فعلية‬, labelled like a ‫جملة اسمية‬.
‫متعلق بالخبر‬ ‫خبر‬ ‫مبتدأ‬

-a ‫جارُومجرور‬ -‫ اسم‬in the ‫ نصب‬status ‫ُاسمُكان‬+ُ‫كان‬
OR
OR like a standard ‫جملةُاسمية‬, we have 3 structures.
Just the ‫ اسم‬can be inside or
-a full sentence
-a special ‫مضاف‬ outside
STANDARD STRUCTURE ABNORMAL STRUCTURE COMPLEX STRUCTURE
‫مبتدأ ‪ +‬خب‪/‬متعلق باخلب‬ ‫متعلق باخلب مقدم ‪ +‬مبتدأ مؤخر‬ ‫مبتدأ ‪ full sentence +‬خب‬
‫ُه َو طال ٌ‬
‫ب‬
‫َ ََ‬
‫َُل قل ٌم‬ ‫ُه َو ( َي ْق َرأُ الكتَ َ‬
‫اب)‬
‫‪STANDARD JI‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َ‬ ‫َ ُ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫ْ‬ ‫َّ ُ ْ ُ َ ْ َ ُ ُ ْ َ ْ‬
‫األ ْوالد ذا ِهبُ ْون‬ ‫ِعن َد ُه َمفا ِتيْ ُح‬ ‫الرسول (ينصحكم بِتق َوى ا ِ‬
‫لل)‬
‫ف َْ‬ ‫ُس َم َّي ُة ِ ْ‬ ‫ٌ َ‬ ‫َ ْ َ َّ‬ ‫َ ْ ُ َّ ُ‬
‫ت‬
‫ابلي ِ‬ ‫ج َر ِة َر ُجل نائِ ٌم‬
‫الش َ‬ ‫َتت‬ ‫ت (ت َع ِل ْمنَ ُه ْم)‬ ‫أن‬
‫اكن‬ ‫‪Translates as: was‬‬ ‫‪Translates as: used to have‬‬ ‫‪Translates as: used to do‬‬
‫طابلًا‬
‫َ َ‬ ‫َ َ َ ََ‬
‫اكن َُل قل ٌم‬ ‫اكن ( َي ْق َرأُ الكتَ َ‬
‫َ‬
‫اكن ِ‬ ‫اب)‬ ‫ِ‬
‫َ َ َْ ُ‬
‫الد َذاهب ْ َ‬ ‫َ‬ ‫َ َ ْ‬ ‫َ َ َّ ُ ْ ُ َ ْ َ ُ ُ ْ َ ْ‬
‫ي‬ ‫ِِ‬ ‫اكن األو‬ ‫اكن ِعن َد ُه َمفا ِتيْ ُح‬ ‫الرسول (ينصحكم بِتق َوى ا ِ‬
‫لل)‬ ‫اكن‬
‫ف َْ‬ ‫ت ُس َم َّي ُة ْ‬
‫َاكنَ ْ‬ ‫ٌ َ‬ ‫َ ْ َ َّ‬ ‫ُ ْ ُ َّ ُ‬
‫ت‬
‫ابلي ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ج َر ِة َر ُجل نائِ ٌم‬
‫الش َ‬ ‫اكن َتت‬ ‫ت (ت َع ِل ْمنَ ُه ْم)‬ ‫كن‬
‫اكن ‪ +‬مضارع‬ ‫‪used to do‬‬ ‫ما زال‪/‬ال يزال ‪ +‬مضارع‬ ‫‪is still doing‬‬
‫أصبح ‪ +‬مضارع‬ ‫‪started to do‬‬ ‫ما دام ‪ +‬مضارع‬ ‫‪remained doing‬‬
‫ظل ‪ +‬مضارع‬ ‫‪kept doing‬‬ ‫ليس ‪ +‬مضارع‬ ‫‪does not do‬‬
‫‪َ, with the addition of two templates.‬جلة فعلية ‪ sentences negate like a‬اكن‬
‫‪PAST‬‬ ‫‪PRESENT‬‬ ‫‪FUTURE‬‬ ‫‪TEMPLATES‬‬
‫ما ‪ +‬ماض‬ ‫ال ‪ +‬مضارع‬ ‫ما اكن ِلـ(اسم َمرور) أن (فعل مضارع منصوب)‬
‫)فعل( ‪) to‬اسم( ‪It was not appropriate for‬‬
‫لن ‪ +‬مضارع منصوب‬
‫لم ‪ +‬مضارع َمزوم‬ ‫ما ‪ +‬مضارع‬ ‫ما اكن (اسم مرفوع) ِلـ(فعل مضارع منصوب)‬
‫‪).‬فعل( ‪) was not one to‬اسم(‬
‫أسماء‬
َ َ
‫ذاك ٌء‬ ٌ ُ ُ ٌ َ ٌ ٌ ُ َ
‫الم – ظل َمات‬ ‫ظ‬ ‫ ِجيَاع‬- ‫َجائِ ٌع‬ ‫شبْ َعان – ِشبَاع‬
intelligence, mental
Darkness hungry full, satiated
acuteness
َ
‫اك ِذ ٌب‬
ٌ
‫َصا ِدق‬
ٌ َ َ
‫اجة – َح َوائِ ُج‬ ‫ح‬ ُ َ‫ِك – أَ ْذ ِكي‬
‫اء‬ ٌّ ِ ‫َذ‬
Dishonest Truthful need, necessity smart
ٌ َْ ٌ ْ َ ٌ َ ٌ
ُ ْ ‫ان – ب َ َسات‬
ٌ َ ُْ ‫ب – أن ِصبَة‬ ‫ن ِصي‬ ‫َز َم ٌن – أ ْز َمان‬ ‫َو ِحيْد‬
‫ي‬ ِ ‫بست‬
portion, share, time period, only, exclusive,
Garden
dividend, fate duration individual
ُ ‫أفعال‬
ً َ ُ َْ َََ ًْ ُ َ َ َ
to carry ‫َحل َي ِمل َحْال‬ to own ‫َملك ي ْم ِلك ُملَك‬
ً َ ْ ُ ُ َ َْ َ َ ً ُ ُ ْ َ َ
to lose ‫رسانا‬ ‫خ ِرس َيرس خ‬ to include ‫ش َمل يَش ُمل ش ُم ْوال‬
َّ َّ َ ْ ْ َ ً ُ ْ َ
They lost at basketball. ِ‫خ ِْسوا ِِف كرة ِ السلة‬ to hate ‫ك ِر َه يَك َر ُه ك ْرها‬
َ ْ َ ً َ ُ َْ َ
to become full ‫ش ِب َع يَشبَ ُع شبْ ًعا‬ to become thirsty ‫َع ِطش يع َطش ع َطشا‬
َْ َُ َ ً َْ ُ
to decide on s/t )‫ق َّر َر يق ِّر ُر تق ِريْ ًرا (َع‬ to move (s/t) ‫َح َّر َك َيَ ِّر ُك َت ِريْكا‬
َ َ َ ْ َ ْ َ َ ْ َّ َ ِّ َ ُ َ َّ َ
ً ْ ‫ك ُر َت ْفك‬
‫حفظ الق ْرآن‬
I decided to memorize
‫قررت لَع أن أ‬ to contemplate (s/t) )‫يا (ف‬ ِ ‫فكر يف‬
the Quran.
ْ َ ِّ َ ُ َ َّ َ ْ َ ِّ ُ َّ
)‫ َع‬،‫ج ُع تش ِجيْ ًعا (ـه‬ )‫َعل َق ي َعل ُق تع ِليْ ًق (َع‬
to encourage s/o to hang/to comment
‫شجع يش‬
towards s/t on
َ َ ْ َ ْ َ َ َ َّ َ
‫ش َّج َعه األ ْس َتاذ لَع‬ ‫المخ َز ِن‬
He hung his clothes in the
The teacher encouraged him closet. ‫علق ِبلاسه ِِف‬
towards completing his studies. َ ‫أ َ ْن ي َتاب َع د َِر‬
‫اس َته‬ Don’t comment about on his
َْ َ ْ ‫َ ل‬
ِ ‫ال تعل ِق لَع أمرِه‬
ِ
issue.
)‫ااع (عن‬ ً َ‫اف َع يُ َداف ُع دف‬ َ َ

‫د‬ )‫يا (عن‬ ُ ‫ْب ُي َّع‬
ً ْ ‫ْب َت ْعب‬ َ َّ ‫َع‬
to defend (s/o) ِ ِ to express (s/t) ِ ِ
َ َ َْ ْ َ ْ‫َل‬
A Muslim defends his faith. ِ‫الم ْسل ِم ي َداف ِع ع ْن دِيْنِه‬ Express yourself. ‫سك‬ ِ ‫ع ِب عن نف‬
ً ‫أَ ْخ َر َج َُيْر ُج إ ْخ َر‬
‫اجا‬
ً َ ْ ُ ُْ َ َ ْ َ
‫أحسن َي ِسن إِحسانا‬
to take out ِ ِ to do with excellence
ْ ‫خر‬ ْ َ ً َ ْ ُ ْ َ َ َْ
Get him out of here. !‫جه م ِْن ه َنا‬ ِ ‫أ‬ to make or let enter ‫أدخل يُد ِخل ِإدخاال‬
ً َ َ َ‫ََتَ َّر َك َيت‬ َ َ َ ْ َّ
‫ح َّر ُك َتَراك‬ ‫اجل َّنة‬ ‫َسي ْدخِل اهلل المتقِي‬
Allah will enter the people
to move (oneself)
of taqwa into Jannah.
138 | P a g e
َ َ َ َ َ ‫ال َت َت‬
ْ ِ ‫ح َّر ْك‬ َ ُ َّ َ َ َ َ َّ َ َ
‫ِف ك ْرس لِيِك هكذا‬ ‫ي تبَينًا‬
Don’t move in your
to become clear ‫تبي يتب‬
chair like that.
ً ْ ُ َْ َ ْ
‫ِاحتَ َمل َيتَ ِمل ِاح ِت َماال‬
ً ِّ ُ َ َ َّ
to tolerate to be described )‫ِات َصف ي َّت ِصف ِات َصافا (بـ‬
ََ َ َْ َ ْ
‫ل ْن َن َت ِمل أذاه ْم‬ ‫الص ْد ِق‬
‫ل‬ َّ
ِ ِ ‫َيت ِصف المؤمِن ب‬
A Mu’min is described with
We will not tolerate their harm.
honesty.
ً ْ ُ َْ ََ ْ ً َ ْ ْ ُ َْ َْ َ َ َْْ
to differ ‫ِاختَلف َيتَ ِلف ِاخ ِتالفا‬ to hasten, urge ‫جاال‬ ‫ِاستعجل يستع ِجل ِاس ِتع‬
139 | P a g e
CHAPTER 11 – THE COMPOUND ‫اسم‬
11.1 INTRODUCTION
There are a handful of tools that appear before a complete sentence and cause it to function like an
ordinary ‫اسم‬. They create what is known as a compound ‫اسم‬.
ْ ‫ل‬
11.2 ‫ أن‬AND ‫أن‬
ُْ َ ‫ أ‬makes the ‫ فعل‬after it light. We learned that ‫ن‬
We learned that ‫ن‬ َُّ َ ‫ أ‬makes the ‫ اسم‬after it ‫منصوب‬. That is
one function that each of these ‫ حروف‬serve. Both of these ‫حروف‬, however, serve another function. They
transform a sentence into a compound ‫اسم‬.
ْ َ
‫أن‬
Let us begin by studying ‫ن‬ ُْ َ ‫أ‬. ‫ن‬
ُْ َ ‫ أ‬transforms a ‫ جملةُفعلية‬into a compound ‫اسم‬.
ْ
Take ‫ يَذهَبُإلىُالمسج ُِد‬as an example. It is a normal ‫جملةُفعلية‬. In order to make it function like an ‫اسم‬, simply
place an ‫ن‬ ُْ َ ‫ أ‬before it.
َ ‫ أ َ ْنُ َي ْذه‬is a compound ‫ اسم‬and can play the role that any other ‫ اسم‬can play. Take a look at the
‫َبُإلىُالمس ِْج ُِد‬
following example.
َ ‫ي ِريْدُُأ َ ْنُ َي ْذه‬
ُ‫َبُ ِإلىُال َمس ِْج ِد‬
He wants to go to the masjid.
َ ‫ ”أنْ ُيَ ْذه‬answers the questions “What does he want to do?” This means that it is a detail or a
“To go to the masjid” or “ُ‫َبُإِلىُال َمس ِْج ِد‬
‫مفعولُبه‬.
َ ‫علَ ْي ُِهُأ َ ْنُيَ ْذه‬

ُ ‫َبُإِلىُال َمس ِْج ُِد‬ َ
He has to go to the masjid.
(lit. it is upon him to go to the masjid)
َ ‫ ”أَنْ ُيَ ْذه‬is a ‫مبتدأُمؤخر‬. The “... ْ‫ ” َعلَ ْيهُِأَن‬template is a useful one to remember when saying “x has to …”
"‫ " َعلَ ْي ُِه‬is a ‫متعلقُبالخبرُمقدم‬. “‫َبُ ِإلىُال َمس ِْج ُِد‬
ٌُ ‫أ َ ْنُتَص ْوم ْواُ َخي‬

ُ ‫ْرُلَك ُْم‬
That you fast is better for you.
“That you fast” or “‫ ”أَنْ ُت َص ْوم ْوا‬is that part before the “is”. It is serving as a ‫ مبتدأ‬in this sentence.
ُْ َ ‫ أ‬is ‫ص َد ِريَّة‬
The technical term for this type of ‫ن‬ ْ ‫أ َ ْنُال َم‬.
َّ َ
‫أن‬
َُّ َ ‫أ‬. ‫ن‬
Next, let us take a look at ‫ن‬ َُّ َ ‫ أ‬transforms a ‫ جملةُاسمية‬into a compound ‫اسم‬.
Take ٌُ‫ ه َوُطالِب‬as an example. It is a normal ‫جملةُاسمية‬. In order to make it function like an ‫اسم‬, simply place
an ُ‫ أن‬before it.
ٌُ‫ أَنَّهُطالِب‬is a compound ‫ اسم‬and can play the role of a regular ism.
َُ‫سب ْونَُُأَنَّه ْمُم ْهتَد ْون‬
َ ‫َو َي ْح‬
They believe that they are committed to guidance
“That they are committed to guidance” or “َُ‫ ”أَنَّه ْمُم ْهتَد ْون‬answers the question “What do they believe?” This means that it is a detail or
a ‫مفعولُبه‬. It is labeled as a ‫مفعولُبهُفيُمحلُنصب‬.
140 | P a g e
َ ُ‫ُت َ َبيَّنَُُلَهُُأَنَّه‬
ُ‫عدو‬
That is he is an enemy became clear to him.
َ ُ‫ ”أَنَّه‬is acting as the ‫فاعل‬. What did the action of becoming clear? That he is an
َُ‫ تَبَيَّن‬is a ‫ فعلُالزم‬and cannot take a ‫مفعول‬. Here, “ُ‫عدو‬
enemy.
11.3 TOOLS THAT CREA TE COMPOUND ‫مضاف إيله‬

Recall that there are a handful of words that indicate time and place. These words are called ‫ ظروف‬and
serve as special ‫مضاف‬. Recall also that an ‫ إضافة‬is a relationship between two ‫اسم‬. There are a few ‫ظروف‬,
however, that are unusual in that they are not followed by another ‫اسم‬. Rather, they are followed by a
complete sentence. This special set of ‫ ظروف‬turns the sentence that follows them into a compound ‫اسم‬,
which serves as a ‫مضافُإليه‬.
ْ
‫إ ِذ‬
‫ إذ‬means “when” and can come with a ‫ جملةُاسمية‬and a ‫جملةُفعلية‬, both ‫ ماض‬and ‫مضارع‬. It translates in the
past-tense regardless of what follows it. Take a look at the following examples.
ُ ِ ‫ضعَ ِفيْنَ ُ ِفيُاأل َ ْر‬

ُ‫ض‬ ُْ ُ‫إِ ْذُأ َ ْنت ْمُقَ ِل ْيلٌُم‬
ْ َ ‫ست‬
ُ ُ‫جملةُاسميةُفيُمحلُجر‬
ُ ‫مضافُإليه‬ ُ ‫ظرفُومضاف‬
when you were small in number, weakened in the land
The above is an example of ‫ ِإذ‬followed by a ‫جملةُاسمية‬.
ُ‫ُم ْنُأ َ ْه ِل َك‬

ِ ‫ت‬ َ ُ‫َو ِإ ْذ‬
َ ‫غ َد ْو‬
ُ ‫جملةُفعليةُفيُمحلُجر‬
ُ ‫ُمضافُإليه‬ ُ ‫ظرفُومضاف‬
when you left your family in the morning
The above is an example of ‫ إِذ‬followed by a ‫فعلُماض‬.
َ َ‫ِإ ْذُت َ ْست َ ِغيْث ْون‬

ُ‫ُربَّك ْم‬
ُ ُ‫جملةُفعليةُفيُمحلُجر‬ ُ ‫ظرفُومضاف‬
ُ ‫مضافُإليه‬
when you called out to your master for help
The above is an example of ‫ إِذ‬followed by a ‫فعلُمضارع‬.
Note that ‫ إذ‬will remain heavy when it does not have a ‫مضافُإليه‬, as in ُ‫يَ ْو َمئِذ‬.
‫إ ِ ذا‬
‫ ِإذا‬can come with a ‫ جملةُاسمية‬and a ‫جملةُفعلية‬, both ‫ ماض‬and ‫مضارع‬. It translates differently depending on
what follows.
‫ إذا‬WITH ‫الجملة االسمية‬

When it comes with a ‫جملةُاسمية‬, it is called ‫إذاُالفجائية‬, the ‫ إذا‬of surprise, and translates as “suddenly” or
“surprisingly”.
َ ‫فَأ َ ْلقاهاُفَإِذاُ ِه‬

‫يُ َحيَّةٌُت َ ْس َعى‬
‫جملةُاسميةُفيُمحلُجر‬ ُ ُ ‫ظرفُومضاف‬
ُ ‫ُمضافُإليه‬
Then he threw it down, and suddenly, it was a fast-moving snake.
‫ إذا‬WITH ‫الجملة الفعلية‬
141 | P a g e
When it comes with a ‫فعلُماض‬, it is called ‫إذاُالشرطية‬, the conditional ‫إذا‬, and it pushes the meaning to the
future tense. It translates as “when” and always comes with a second part (when x happens, y). Only the
first portion (the x) is considered a ‫مضاف‬. The use of the ‫ فعلُماض‬indicates a single event.
ْ َ‫ُو ِجل‬
ُ ‫تُقل ْوبه ُْم‬ َ ‫ِإذاُذ ِك َرُهللا‬
ُ‫جملةُفعليةُفيُمحلُجر‬
When Allah is mentioned (even once), their hearts are humbled.
The use of the ‫ فعلُمضارع‬indicates a repeated event.
ُ ‫ناُولَّىُم ْست َ ْك ِب ًرا‬

َ ‫علَ ْي ِهُآيات‬
َ ُ‫َو ِإذاُتَتْلَى‬
ُ‫جملةُفعليةُفيُمحلُجر‬ ُ
And when our miraculous signs are recited to him (repeatedly), he turns away arrogantly.
َ‫ي َ و ْ م‬
‫ يَ ْوم‬means “day” and can come with both a ‫ جملةُاسمية‬and a ‫جملةُفعلية‬. In both cases, it translates as “the
day on which…”
َُ‫ُبارز ْون‬
ِ ‫يَ ْو َمُه ْم‬
ُ‫جملةُاسميةُفيُمحلُجر‬ the day on which they are exposed ُ ‫ظرفُومضاف‬
ُ ‫مضافُإليه‬
َ ‫َي ْو َمُالُ َي ْنفَعُمال‬
َُ‫ٌُوالُ َبن ْون‬
‫جملةُفعليةُفيُمحلُجر‬
ُ ‫ُمضافُإليه‬ ُ ‫ظرفُومضاف‬
the day on which neither money nor children will be of benefit
Note that ‫ يَ ْو َُم‬does not come with a ‫فعلُماض‬.
Also note that though ‫ يَ ْو َُم‬has the potential to create a compound ‫اسم‬, it can also act as an ordinary ‫ظرف‬
and can be followed by a regular ‫اسم‬.
ُ‫َي ْو َمُال ِقيا َم ِة‬

ُ ‫مضافُإليهُمجرور‬ ُ ‫ظرفُومضاف‬
the day of standing
142 | P a g e
THE ‫ حرف‬REFERENCE SHEET
‫ – أدوات االستفهام‬QUESTIONING WORDS
َ َ َْ َ َ َ
‫أي‬ ‫ أ‬/‫ه ل‬ ‫كيْف‬ ‫ل ِماذا‬ ‫أ ْي َن‬ ‫َم َت‬ ‫ ما‬/‫ماذا‬ ‫َم ْن‬
which did how why where when what who
‫الم اتلوكيد‬
DESCRIPTION:
- used for emphasis

- can attach to an ‫ اسم‬or ‫ فعل‬or ‫حرف‬
- has no grammatical effect
َ
- always takes a ‫)ل( فتحة‬
LABEL: ‫المُالت َّ ْو ِكيْد‬
EXAMPLES:
ْ ْ ْ َ ْ َََْ َّ ْ َ َّ ‫َتل ْؤم‬ ْ ِ َ‫سان ل‬

َ ْ َّ
‫ْشك‬
ِ ‫ولعبد مؤمِن خي مِن م‬ ‫ِن بِهِ َوتلَنصنه‬ ‫ف خ ْْس‬ ‫اإلن‬
ِ ‫إِن‬
No doubt, a believing slave is You will DEFINITELY believe in Certainly, the human being is
better than a polytheist. him and help him. definitely in loss.
ْ‫ق َ د‬
DESCRIPTION:
- in the Quran, it is always for emphasis or with the meaning “already”

- in modern Arabic, it means “might” when used with the present-tense and “certainly” or
“already” when used with the past-tense
- used only with ‫فعل‬
LABEL: ‫( حرفُتَحْ ِقيْق‬with past-tense) /‫( حرفُت َ ْق ِليْل‬with present-tense)
EXAMPLE:
َ ْ ََْ َ ْ َْ ‫َل‬ َ َ
‫ق ْد أفل َح المؤمِن ْون‬ ‫ِي مِنك ْم‬ ‫ق ْد َي ْعلم اهلل المعوِق‬
Certainly, the believers have Allah already knows the
already succeeded. hinderers among you.
143 | P a g e
‫ سوف‬/ ‫س‬
DESCRIPTION:
- used only with the present-tense

- pushes the meaning to the future-tense
LABEL: ‫ستِ ْق َبال‬

ْ ِ‫حرفُا‬
EXAMPLE:
َْ َ
َ َ َ
‫َس َيق ْول ْون ثالثة رابِعه ْم َكبه ْم‬ ْ ‫قَ َال َس ْو َف أ ْس َت ْغفِر لَك ْم َر ل‬
‫ب‬ ِ
They will say “four, the fifth is He said “I will ask my master for
their dog.” forgiveness for you.”
‫واو استئنافية‬
DESCRIPTION:
- used to start a new sentence

- is not translated
LABEL: ‫واوُاالستئناف‬/‫واوُاستئنافية‬
EXAMPLE:
َّ َ َ
‫َواهلل خل َق ُك دابَّة م ِْن ماء‬
Allah created every creature
from water.
‫إ ِ مَّ ا‬
DESCRIPTION:
- means “either”
- always used twice in a sentence to mean “either x or y”
LABEL: ‫حرفُت َْخيِيْر‬
EXAMPLE:
َْ َ َ َ َ َْ ْ َ
َ ِ ‫إ ِ َّما أ ْن تل‬
‫ق وِإ ِ َّما أن نك ْون أ َّول َم ْن أل ِق‬
Either you throw down, or we
will be the first to throw down.
144 | P a g e
‫حروف العطف‬
DESCRIPTION:
- connects two words
- carries over status
LABEL: ُ‫طف‬ْ ‫ع‬
َ ُ‫حرف‬
‫و‬:
َ and
َ
‫ب‬‫َ َ َ ْ َ َ َّ ل‬ َ َ َ َّ
ِ ِ ‫إِن اهلل ومالئِكته يصلون لَع انل‬
Certainly Allah and His angels send their blessings to the Prophet.
‫أَو‬: or
َ ََ َ َ َ َ َ َ
‫ارة ِ أ ْو أشد ق ْس َوة‬‫ف ِيه اكحل ِج‬
So they are like stone or even harder.
‫ثُم‬: and then

َ َ ْ ْ َ‫اللـهِ َوكنت ْم أ َ ْم َواتا فَأ‬
َّ َ ْ َ ََْ
‫ح َياك ْم ث َّم ي ِميتك ْم ث َّم َييِيك ْم ث َّم إِيلْهِ ت ْر َجعون‬ ِ ‫كيف تكفرون ب‬
How do you disbelieve in Allah when you were lifeless then he gave life to
you, then he will make you lifeless, then he will give you life, then you will
be returned to Him?
‫ف‬:
َ and then/so
ْ َ َ َ َّ َ َ َ َ َ ْ َّ
‫اك ف َع َدلك‬‫اَّلِي خلق فسو‬
The one who create you then fashioned you perfectly then proportioned
you
*Note: ‫ ف‬and ‫ ثم‬differ in that ‫ ثم‬indicates a longer duration of time.
‫بَل‬: rather
َْ َّ ‫حانَه بَل َّهل َما ِف‬ َّ َ َ َّ
َ ْ‫اهلل َو َلا سب‬ َ
‫ات َواأل ْر ِض‬ َ ‫الس َم‬
ِ ‫او‬ ِ ‫َوقالوا اَّتذ‬
And they said “Allah took a son”. He is above that! Rather he has
whatever is in the skies and the earth.
‫لَكِن‬: however
ْ َ َ َّ َ َ ْ ْ ِ ْ ‫أ َ ْس ِم ْع به ْم َو َأب‬
‫ص يَ ْو َم يَأت ْون َنا لك ِْن الظال ِم ْون ايلَ ْو َم ِِف ضالل مبِي‬ ِِ
145 | P a g e
How clearly they will hear and see on that day that they come to us;
however, the wrongdoers today are in clear error.
146 | P a g e

DOC-baiyyinah Notes

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originaltitel

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

DOC-baiyyinah Notes

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

TABLE OF CONTENTS – ‫الفهرس‬

Chapter 1 – Types of Words In Arabic .......................................................................................................... 1

2.1 Status – ‫ اإلعراب‬........................................................................................................................... 5

2.2 how to tell Status ....................................................................................................................... 7

2.8 ‫ حرف انلصب واسمها‬........................................................................................................................ 23

Chapter 3 – ‫ القسم‬- ‫ العدد‬-‫ اجلنس‬..................................................................................................................... 32

3.1 Gender – ‫الجنس‬......................................................................................................................... 32

Chapter 4 – ‫ اسم‬in action ............................................................................................................................. 43

4.1 ‫ املوصوف والصفة‬............................................................................................................................. 43

4.2 ‫ اسم اإلشارة واملشار إيله‬..................................................................................................................... 44

4.3 Connector Letters – ‫ حروف العطف‬.............................................................................................. 49

5.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................. 54

Chapter 7 – ‫ الفعل المضارع‬.............................................................................................................................. 84

7.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................................. 84

A few examples of a PERSON would be:

A few examples of a PLACE would be:

A few examples of a THING would be:

A few examples of an IDEA would be:

A few examples of an ADJECTIVE would be:

A few examples of a FUTURE -TENSE ‫ فعل‬would be:

A few examples of a ‫ حرف‬would be:

VOCABULARY ( SINGULAR - PLURAL )

Remember not to lose sight of where we are in our studies.

‫فعل‬ Type ‫قسم‬

2.1 STATUS – ‫اإلعراب‬

‫فعل‬ Type ‫قسم‬

I ate too much chocolate.

The dentist gave me a filling.

When searching for the doer in a sentence, follow a two-step process:

1. Identify the action

Note that it is possible for the doer to be non-human.

1) Find the action and the doer

Muhammad ate chocolate at home yesterday happily because he was hungry.

doer action detail detail detail detail detail

STATUS #3 : AFTER-OF - ‫جر‬

advisor of the king

angrily. The teacher lost his job.

2.2 HOW TO TELL STAT US

MEMORIZE these charts.

Plural Pair Singular

Plural Feminine Pair Feminine Singular Feminine

Let us now take a closer look at each number/gender combination.

Status Ending Sound

Status Ending Sound

Status Ending Combination

Status Ending Combination

Notice that the ‫ ت‬always takes a ‫فتحة‬.

Status Ending Combination

Status Ending Combination

Plural Feminine Plural Masculine Pair Singular

➢ DRILL 2 Is the word “Muslim” ‫( رفع‬R) or ‫( نصب‬N) or ‫( جر‬J).

1. A Muslim woman travelled. R/N/J

2. The religion of a Muslim is Islam. R/N/J

3. I met a Muslim woman. R/N/J

4. The religion of Muslims is Islam. R/N/J

5. Two Muslims travelled. R/N/J

6. Muslims travelled. R/N/J

7. I met a Muslim. R/N/J

8. The religion of two Muslims is Islam. R/N/J

9. I met Muslims. R/N/J

10. The house of a Muslim woman is clean. R/N/J

2.3 LIGHT VS HEAVY

Plural Pair Singular